JP2020185468A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing dynamic display time of one identification information while enhancing interest in a game without causing a player to get tired.SOLUTION: When false variation performed during one variation display is executed for five times (in the case of "five" false variation times), a "role" where it is determined that a special ready-to-win results and a jackpot results, and a "role" where it is determined that a ready-to-win does not result and complete losing results are at least granted. When the number of false variation times is five, it is configured that a degree of expectation toward a jackpot is the highest in the case where the ready-to-win is satisfied. Thus, a player can increase a degree of expectation toward satisfaction of a ready-to-win and a jackpot by repetition of false variation in a process reaching complete losing even if the complete losing results through five pseudo variations. Thus, interest in a game is enhanced without causing the player to get tired, and false continuation is allowed to occur frequently, thus increasing one average variation time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of games. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting winning prize). For example, three horizontal or vertical scrolls in the effective display area, or 3 × 3 squares. A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It causes a big hit when there is.

As one aspect of this variation effect, there is an aspect in which the symbol is fixedly displayed after the pseudo symbol variation is repeatedly executed during the one variation effect. Conventionally, in this embodiment, if the number of repetitions of the pseudo symbol variation performed during the one-variation effect is small, it will be out of order in most cases, and conversely, the larger the number of repetitions of the pseudo symbol variation, the larger the hit. It is configured to have high expectations. As a result, as the pseudo pattern fluctuation is repeated, the player is provided with an interest in which the expectation of becoming a big hit gradually increases.

Further, in the variation effect in which the pseudo symbol variation is performed, the variation time is longer by the amount that the pseudo symbol variation is repeated, as compared with the variation effect in which the pseudo symbol variation is not performed. Therefore, in the conventional game machine, in order to reduce as much as possible that the starting prize is reduced and the fluctuation effect is interrupted, even if the game is off, a lot of variation effects that perform pseudo symbol variation with a small number of repetitions are performed once. The average fluctuation time of is lengthened.

JP-A-2010-259564

However, in the case of deviation, if a large number of fluctuation effects that perform pseudo symbol fluctuations are performed with a small number of repetitions, most of the fluctuation effects in which the pseudo symbol fluctuations are performed will be out of order, and in the end, the player will be given a change time. It was perceived as a time-saver, and there was a risk that the player would be fed up.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and it takes a long time to dynamically display one identification information for a long time while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be transformed.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display means for displaying identification information such as a symbol, a main control means for controlling the game, and a control command transmitted from the main control means. A special control means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the above, and is a predetermined game value when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine that imparts a gaming state, and the slave control means is performed by the display means from among a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information when the control command is received. A selection means for selecting a display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is provided, and the display mode is a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information. The display mode includes a plurality of display modes in which the predetermined number of times is different, and the selection means performs the pseudo dynamic display a specific number of times among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. Dynamic of the identification information so that the expectation that the predetermined display result will appear is the highest when the suggestion display suggesting that the predetermined display result may appear is performed. Select a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed when the display mode of the display is selected and a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display. In this case, a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the specified number of times is selected.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specified number of times is the most pseudo dynamic display among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. It is the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the selection means has a large number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. The more the suggestion display is performed, the more likely it is that the predetermined display result will appear, so that the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information. A plurality of display modes having different predetermined times are included. Then, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. Is the highest expectation that the predetermined display result will appear when the suggestion display suggesting that the predetermined display result may appear in the dynamic display is performed. In addition, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display. When the display is performed, the pseudo dynamic display is always performed a specific number of times. As a result, even if the suggestion display is not performed after a specific number of pseudo dynamic displays and a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times. As a result, the suggestion display is performed, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation that a predetermined display result will appear. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display the identification information of the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display that can lengthen the time related to the dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, so that the player can go to the game without getting bored. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be lengthened while enhancing the interest of the user.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific number of times is the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed most among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in the most pseudo-dynamic display mode among the display modes in which the pseudo-dynamic display is performed, a predetermined display is performed in the dynamic display. When a suggestion display suggesting that the result may appear is performed, the expectation that the predetermined display result will appear is the highest. In addition, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display, the pseudo dynamic display is always performed. Among the display modes in which the dynamic display is performed, the display mode in which the most pseudo dynamic display is performed is selected. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times is frequently performed, so that the dynamic display time of the identification information at one time can be lengthened. is there.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means, the greater the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display, the more suggestive. When the display is performed, there is a high possibility that a predetermined display result will appear. As a result, even if the suggestion display is not performed after a specific number of pseudo dynamic displays and a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic display is performed in the process up to that point. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation that a predetermined display result will appear until the display is performed a specific number of times. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be lengthened while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and FIG. 3E schematically shows a fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability variation). It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a figure which showed the "role" given to the pseudo-variation number of times performed in one variation display in the pseudo-ream of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect when the pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally rushes into the reach, and (b) is a schematic diagram in which the pseudo-variation is performed four times and finally. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content when rushing into the reach, and (c) schematically shows the effect content when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally rushes into the reach. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally completely deviates, and (b) is the 5th time when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents when the out-of-order symbol is temporarily stopped due to the pseudo-variation of the above, and then the re-variation is performed to determine the jackpot. (A) is a time chart showing the normal reach selected in the case of fluctuation A, and (b) is a time chart showing "5 times pseudo fluctuation + deviation" selected in the case of fluctuation F. (A) is a time chart showing the super reach selected in the case of fluctuation B, and (b) is a time chart showing "three pseudo fluctuations + normal reach" selected in the case of fluctuation B. (C) is a time chart showing "3 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" selected in the case of fluctuation B, and (d) is "3 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach" selected in the case of fluctuation B. , And (e) is a time chart showing “5 times pseudo-variation + resurrection” selected in the case of variation B. (A) is a time chart showing the special reach selected in the case of fluctuation C, and (b) is a time chart showing "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" selected in the case of fluctuation C. , (C) is a time chart showing "4 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach" selected in the case of fluctuation C, and (d) is "5 times pseudo fluctuation + special" selected in the case of fluctuation C. It is a time chart showing "reach". It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the additional data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the comparison process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the synthetic data table schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the demo command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the comparison process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the demo command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the comparison process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 48, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variable effect (a change in which a variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is performed) and a reach effect performed when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are performed. , Designed to be tailored to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, illumination portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50.

An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port (starting port) 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display fluctuations by indicating whether or not the fluctuations are being made in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) by the lighting state, or stop symbols after the fluctuations are completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64, the balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the ball is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. .. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and time saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, the "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time saving state occurs during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later is increased, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened. By making it easier, the game includes a state in which the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased while the jackpot probability remains the same. It refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily enter the first entry port 64 by making it easier for the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 to be opened.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or one hit in the second symbol is made according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, the time saving state or the high probability state in the low probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the first entry port 64 is longer than in other gaming states. Further, the time-saving state or the high-probability state in the low-probability state may be a state in which the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time in the second symbol is larger than in other gaming states.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that displays a variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball at the second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 12) described later, for example, left and middle. And the three symbols on the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It provides a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the fluctuation display is finished. When shifting to the high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high-probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice is given by putting it out.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, one variation display is performed as one aspect of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is configured so that a so-called "pseudo-ream" in which the pseudo-variation of the third symbol is continuously performed a plurality of times can be performed. "Pseudo-ream" is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display in which the pseudo-ream is executed. The variation effect is performed according to the mode in which the pseudo variation) is repeatedly performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12, but in the "pseudo-ream", the number of repetitions of the pseudo-stop and re-variation performed during this one variation display (that is, the pseudo-variation is continuously performed). As the number of times) increases, the number of repetitions is determined so that the expectation that a jackpot will be given after the fluctuation display increases. As a result, the player can feel that the more the pseudo-variation is repeated during the display of one variation, the higher the possibility of becoming a big hit, so the variation production by the "pseudo-ream" is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game for the player.

Then, when the variation effect by this "pseudo-ream" is performed, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used regardless of the above-mentioned main display area Dm and sub-display area Ds, and the "pseudo-ream" is used. Display an image of fluctuation effect. The details of the image of the variation effect by this "pseudo-ream" will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry is suspended up to four times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the front frame 12, etc. are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls is increased according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. May be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64, and the number of times of passing through the second ball entry port 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example). , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the fluctuation display is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol. A stop display is displayed on the effective line L1 of the device 81. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and has a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and various data and the like are temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a big hit lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a deviation variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. Further, the RAM 203 controls the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 28). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 28). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b for each counter at the update timing of the counter. Update the counter.

The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas). The holding area is each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b according to the timing of entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64. This is an area for temporarily storing (holding). Further, the execution area stores the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the fluctuation pattern and the stop type of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation effect at the start timing of the fluctuation. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 201 detects the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time are detected. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no hold in the hold area and all of the hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first to second areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold third area. When there are three holds in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first to third areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold fourth area. As a result, the values of the counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the hold 1st area, the hold 2nd area, the hold 3rd area, and the hold 4th area in the order of the start winning. Can be done. If a start winning prize is detected while the values of the counters are stored in all of the reserved first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being reserved. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four starting prizes.

Further, when the start timing of the fluctuation effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold first area to the execution area, and the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, a big hit lottery, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

Further, after the value of each counter in the hold 1st area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the hold 2nd area is shifted to the vacant hold 1st area and stored in the hold 3rd area. The value of each counter is shifted to the vacant second area of hold, and the value of each counter stored in the fourth area of hold is shifted to the vacant third area of hold. As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first hit random number counter C1 is a counter to be used for the jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). The first random number counter C1 is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is done by returning to 0 afterwards. In addition, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is used. As a new initial value, the first random number counter C1 is set, and the value is updated from the initial value.

As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used for the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also composed of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, but is also updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 28).

The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. Then, at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big hit random number value, also referred to as a hit value) that becomes a big hit, and a big hit. Perform a lottery. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot (big hit random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the reserved ball storage area 203c (to be exact, the reserved ball storage). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the area 203c) matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot. In this jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot random number value whose game state is referred to in a low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability change is not in progress) and a jackpot random number value whose game state is referred to in a high probability state (that is, during probability change). It is divided into and, and the number of jackpot random number values included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random number values that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values "7,307,582" are associated with the "low probability state" and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in a high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is stored.

When determining the jackpot, the MPU 201 reads the jackpot random number value corresponding to the game state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, in the MPU 201, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c) used for determining the jackpot is the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

That is, when the game state is a low probability state, a big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of "7,307,582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the game state is a high probability state, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 420, 448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (starting prize). Together with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any of the hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the way, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, "15R probability variation jackpot", the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") when the counter is out of order. For example, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is determined. That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The stop types selected in the present embodiment include "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the final stop symbol after the same reach occurs. There are three stop (directing) patterns: "reach other than front and rear disengagement", which stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete disengagement", where reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the way, the stop type in the variation effect Is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at the time of disconnection is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to "front and back out reach" and "front and back out of reach" is narrow, with "front and back out reach" of 98,99 and "front and back out of reach" of 90 to 97. It becomes difficult to select "out of reach" or "reach other than front and back out of reach".

In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a fluctuation pattern. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is added one by one in the range of 0 to 198, reaches the maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 28).

At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and the fluctuation pattern to be executed by the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuation effect. To determine. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

That is, the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the third symbol is selected from the fluctuation modes capable of displaying fluctuations in the fluctuation time. The details of the variation mode of the third symbol to be displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol in a variable manner, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the variation display. At the same time as outputting, the lamps of the lamp display devices 227 (illumination units 29 to 33) are turned on and blinked.

As described above, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are described in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main control device 110 can be easily performed. Further, when the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, and the command required for the notification is, for example, 3. There is a risk that it will have to be composed of more than bytes, which may complicate sending and receiving commands. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, if only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like. Often, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated transmission / reception of commands. Further, even if the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the specified variation time from among many variation modes. However, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the variation in the determined variation mode, it is possible to give the player a variety of variation effects and improve the interest of the player. be able to.

By the way, in this embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern table 202c for jackpot are used at the time of deviation. A variation pattern table 202d for disengagement is prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern table 202d, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern is used depending on whether the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, or a low probability state at normal time excluding the time saving state. A table 202d2 and a variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

Here, the details of various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). First, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into a common 15R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the jackpot random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is selected. Correspondingly, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

Common to the 15R jackpot, the fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and a fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. The correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10, fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

When variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of normal reach under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of super reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect by pseudo variation is performed. Will be. Further, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of special reach by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, or the variation effect due to the pseudo variation is performed. Is done.

The no-reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). The super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a reach with a variation time longer than that of the normal reach (for example, a reach that develops from a long reach or a normal reach). In addition, the special reach is a special in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach with a fluctuation time longer than the super reach (for example, the reach further developed after the super reach and the development destination from the normal reach are different from the super reach. Reach, etc.) Fluctuation pattern. Since the table common to the 15R jackpot is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring the normal reach and super reach to be selected, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any reach.

As for the normal reach, super reach, and special reach executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, many different production contents are prepared even if the fluctuation time is the same. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, a reach in which a predetermined character is displayed is prepared when two symbols on the effective line L1 become the same symbol and are in the reach state or at other timings. ing. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, and a reach that adds a production that becomes a big hit by re-variation. ing. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of variable effects and enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation B or the variation C is determined as the variation pattern, not only the reach but also the variation effect by the pseudo-ream can be executed by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The player's interest is further enhanced by the pseudo-ren. This pseudo-ream will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13.

The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R variation (59 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared fluctuation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , The variable effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken", or a "girl" that does not normally appear. Along with the character, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter for finely adjusting the fluctuation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, and whether or not to add a notice effect that announces the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the fluctuation effect. It may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is exclusively for complete disengagement, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, and front / rear disengagement reach and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a jackpot value (big hit random number value) at the start of fluctuation, that is, if it is a value that is out of order, the gaming state excludes the time saving state. When the probability is low during normal operation, the variation corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area corresponds to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The pattern is determined from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern.

For complete deviation only, as fluctuation patterns, fluctuation D where fluctuation ends in a short time of 7 seconds and reach is not established, fluctuation E which is longer than fluctuation D at 10 seconds but no reach is established, and fluctuation. The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a fluctuation F in which the pseudo-variation by the pseudo-ream is performed 5 times in one fluctuation, and finally the reach is not established and the variation F is completely out, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 As for the correspondence between, the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the variation E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the variation F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. Further, in common reach, there are the above-mentioned fluctuation A (30 seconds), fluctuation B (60 seconds), and fluctuation C (90 seconds) as fluctuation patterns, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is fluctuation A. (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and fluctuation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

FIG. 7 (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (e), the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, similarly to the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is divided into the one for complete disconnection and the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than front and rear detachment reach and the reach other than front and rear detachment are determined as the stop type at the time of detachment. Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group for each of the divided groups. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selected when the complete deviation only is referred to does not include the fluctuation F (55 seconds), and only the fluctuation D (7 seconds) and the fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. Further, the variation patterns selected when the reach common is referred to include variation A (30 seconds), variation B (60 seconds), and variation C (90 seconds), as in the deviation pattern table 202d1. ).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, and the game state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, execution is performed. Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is the deviation pattern table 202d2. Is determined from.

In this deviation pattern table 202d2, the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for fluctuation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for fluctuation E (10 seconds). It has become. Further, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 98 for the fluctuation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for the fluctuation B, and 191 to 198 for various out-of-order special reach.

Since the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, it is considered that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. Become. Therefore, when a fluctuation F having a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is performed or a fluctuation E having a relatively long fluctuation time is performed frequently in a time-saving state or a high probability state, the following It takes time to start the variable display, which may give the player a waiting state, which may cause discomfort to the player. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the case of complete deviation, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the gaming state is more variable than when it is in the normal state excluding the time saving state. By configuring the variation D, which has a shorter variation time than E, to be easily selected and starting the next variation display at an early stage, the possibility of causing discomfort to the player can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). In addition, when reach is established at the time of disconnection, another variable type counter determines how many symbols the first symbol (or third symbol) to be stopped at the end is shifted to stop (for example, one symbol is displaced before and after). May be determined by.

Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls. In the case of (for example, if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage), the variation display may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 7 (d) and 7 (e), the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Fluctuation D and variation E may be configured to be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 6, various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, for example, after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack that stores the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, in addition to the counter buffer 203b and the holding ball storage area 203c for storing the various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 28) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a. The hold ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) up to 4 times. The initial value of the reserved ball counter 203a is set to zero, and each time a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S1403 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation display based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 25). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation display itself held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the hold ball number counter 203a is added. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

On the other hand, the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 includes the number of hold balls and the RAM 203 according to the entry timing (starting winning timing) to the first entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203b of the above is also included and notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the hold ball number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the hold ball number command. From each value, the stop display mode when the variation effect based on the corresponding start prize is performed is estimated, the estimated stop display mode, and the value of the number of held balls at that time indicated by the hold ball number command. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous advance notice effects for the variable effect held at that time.

The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests (notices) that the result of the lottery performed with the start winning is likely to be a big hit, and all the variable effects (variable display) held at the time of winning the prize. ), The same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the variation effect. For example, by displaying a "bubble" image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the stop display of the variation effect over all the pending variation effects, the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the variation effect. Even if the jackpot is not a big hit, the player can continuously see the "bubble" image immediately after the fluctuation is stopped over multiple fluctuation displays, so that the player can get a jackpot after the continuous advance notice production is completed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to be obtained and to motivate the player to continue the game.

In addition, "eggs" are displayed during the first fluctuation production, "chicks" are displayed during the second fluctuation production, "chicken" is displayed during the third fluctuation production, and during the fourth fluctuation production. Display the "chicken group" (however, if the number of reserved balls at the time when the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, the "chicken group" is displayed in the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is set). As a result, the symbol displayed by the continuous advance notice effect gradually changes (steps up) each time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By looking at it, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that when the chicken group is displayed, it will be a big hit in the variable effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

In addition, when the variable effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3, the continuous advance notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken group", and the variable effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set is 2. In some cases, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chicken group", and when the variable effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is 1, the "chicken group" is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is suddenly displayed, so that the player can display the suddenly displayed chicken group. Looking at it, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production in which the chicken group is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of starting winning is set by the hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device. Notifying 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous advance notice effect based on the values of the various counters notified by the hold ball number command and the value of the number of hold balls. Do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, the execution conditions of the continuous advance notice effect can be set in various modes.

Further, the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 with one command for the number of reserved balls. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the starting winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous advance notice effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 113 is facilitated as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. be able to.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The ROM 222 has at least a detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, and the RAM 223 has at least a hold ball number counter 223a and a detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b. Here, first, the reserved ball number counter 223a will be described, and then the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a will be described.

The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls of the variable effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 32).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). In this way, since the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, or stores the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball number counter 223a after storage or update.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2751 in FIG. 43A). As described above, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the hold counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the hold counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a determine the variation mode (detailed variation pattern) of the variation effect to be started from now on based on the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. Counters and tables.

In the present embodiment, as a detailed fluctuation pattern determined when the fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, no character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 30 seconds. In addition to the normal normal reach, a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while fluctuating are prepared. Further, as a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character may be displayed during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, or the rear image may be rapidly changed and displayed. In addition to a plurality of super reach such as, a plurality of pseudo-reams in which pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are prepared. As a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 90 seconds, the rear image is rapidly changed and displayed, and the like. In addition to a plurality of special reach, a plurality of pseudo-reams in which pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times during a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are prepared. Further, as a detailed fluctuation pattern determined when the 2R fluctuation (variation time 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of fluctuation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot with a fluctuation time of 59 seconds are prepared.

The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a are prepared for the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed for the variation pattern command from a plurality of detailed variation patterns.

The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is periodically updated (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1912 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30)). The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is composed of a loop counter, and its update is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). It is done by returning. Further, the initial value "0" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on.

In the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a, various detailed variations prepared for each fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation) notified from the main controller 110 are provided. The value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is determined in association with the fluctuation pattern. Further, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is determined by the fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B) depending on whether the symbol confirmed and displayed in the fluctuation effect is "big hit" or "off". , Fluctuation C, 2R variation) are associated separately.

When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is from the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 in the "big hit" of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. The detailed variation pattern associated with the value is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. If it is determined that the variation type is out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b read from the RAM 223 in the "outlier" of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. The detailed variation pattern associated with the value is specified from the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a.

The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and also causes the display control device 114 to display the determined detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect according to the determined detailed variation pattern.

When the fluctuation D (variation time 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared in which the fluctuation time of 7 seconds is completely deviated. There is. When the fluctuation E (variation time 10 seconds) is instructed, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for the details of the mode in which the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is completely deviated after the lapse. Further, when the fluctuation F (fluctuation time 55 seconds) is instructed, the pseudo fluctuation by the pseudo-ream is performed 5 times within the fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and finally the reach is not established and the complete deviation occurs. There is one variation pattern.

Therefore, when any of the fluctuations D, E, and F is instructed by the main control device 110, the MPU 221 prepares a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to each of them regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223a. Is determined, and based on this, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed fluctuation pattern thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by the display fluctuation pattern command.

Here, the pseudo-ream prepared for the fluctuation B, the fluctuation C, and the fluctuation F will be described. As described above, the pseudo-ream is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is performed according to a mode in which pseudo stop and re-variation (pseudo variation) of the third symbol are repeatedly performed during one variation display, and this one variation display. The greater the number of times the pseudo-stop and re-variation are repeated during (that is, the number of times the pseudo-variation is continuously performed), the higher the expectation that a jackpot will be given after the variation is displayed. As a result, the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases as the pseudo-variation is repeated during the display of one variation. Therefore, by performing the variation effect by the pseudo-ream, the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player.

In the pseudo-ream, in order to enhance such an effect, the number of pseudo-variations performed during one variation display is often given a "role". This "role" is a game that determines what the final fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production will be according to the number of pseudo fluctuations performed during one fluctuation display, and whether or not it will be a big hit as a result of the fluctuation production. It is the role of informing people. That is, by this role, the final fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation result of the jackpot lottery are suggested to the player by the number of pseudo fluctuations.

In the conventional pseudo-ream, for example, when the pseudo-variation is performed twice during the display of one variation, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "2 times", the final fluctuation pattern is unlikely to reach. It is a probability, but as a result, it is given a "role" that is out of place. When the pseudo-variation is performed three times during the display of one variation, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "3", it is determined that the final variation pattern is reach, but the probability of being out of order as a result. Is given the "role" of being high. When the pseudo-variation is performed 4 times during the display of one variation, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "4 times", it is confirmed that the final fluctuation pattern is super reach, and as a result, the probability of becoming a big hit. Is given the "role" of being high. Further, when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times during the display of one variation, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "5 times", a "role" is given to determine that the result is a big hit. Since the number of pseudo fluctuations "1 time" means a normal fluctuation pattern without fluctuation (that is, a fluctuation pattern without pseudo stop and difference fluctuation), no "role" is given in the pseudo series.

By giving such a role to the number of pseudo-variations, it is possible to provide the player with an interest in which the expectation of becoming a big hit gradually increases as the pseudo-variations are repeated, and also has the following effects. That is, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing", it is possible to frequently generate a pseudo-ream with a pseudo-variation number of "2 times" as a variation pattern. Since the fluctuation pattern by the pseudo-ream has a long fluctuation time for performing the pseudo-variation, many long-time fluctuation effects can be executed even if there is a "disengagement". Further, even in the case of reach, by performing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times, the fluctuation time can be lengthened by the amount of the pseudo-variation. As a result, the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened, so that even if the starting prize (ball entry to the first entry port 64) is small, the variation effect is interrupted in the third symbol display device 81, and the demonstration It is possible to reduce the situation where the screen is displayed for a long time as much as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game without worrying about the small number of starting prizes.

Because of such an effect, in the conventional pachinko machine, a pseudo-ream having the above-mentioned role has been frequently used for the purpose of lengthening the average fluctuation time of one time. However, in the conventional pseudo-ren, since the jackpot lottery itself is irrelevant to the selection of the pseudo-ren, most of the frequently occurring pseudo-ren have two pseudo-variations. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the pseudo-ream has started, in most cases, the deviation is confirmed by the second pseudo-variation. Also, even if the third pseudo-fluctuation starts, if the reach is established there, the pseudo-variation ends at the third pseudo-variation, and it is disappointing to know that it will be off with a high probability. Therefore, the player is only interested in whether the pseudo stop is actually performed or the reach is established in the third pseudo fluctuation. In this way, in the conventional pseudo-ream that has the above role, even if the pseudo-fluctuation starts, in most cases there is no expectation for a big hit, and in the end, the player is regarded as a time earner of the fluctuation time. There was a risk that the player would get tired of it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo-ream occurs, it is possible to have some expectation regardless of the number of times of the pseudo-variation, and as a result, it may be out of order. However, a "role" is given to each number of pseudo-variations so that the expectation can be maintained until the deviation is confirmed and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prolong the average fluctuation time of one time by causing the pseudo-ream to occur frequently while enhancing the interest in the game without getting the player bored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, in the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment, the “role” given to the number of pseudo-variations performed during one variation display will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the "role" given to the number of pseudo-variations performed during one variation display in the pseudo-ream for each number of pseudo-variations.

In the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment, the pseudo-variation is always performed three times or more. That is, the fluctuation does not end or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo fluctuations, and the pseudo-ream always continues. Then, when the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed three times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "3 times", the reach (normal reach, super reach, or special reach) is the final variation pattern. Is confirmed, and the "role" that the probability of becoming a big hit is high is given. When the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed four times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "4 times", the final variation pattern is at least super reach (that is, super reach or special reach). It is confirmed that the probability of winning a jackpot is even higher than in the case of the pseudo-variation number of "3 times".

Further, when the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed 5 times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "5 times", the following three "roles" are given. The first is the "role" that determines that the final fluctuation pattern will be a special reach and a big hit. The second is the "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern is not reach, but complete deviation is confirmed. The third is the "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern does not reach, but once a pseudo stop is made with a missed symbol, but then re-variation is performed to determine the jackpot. In other words, if the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times during the display of one variation, whether the special reach is established and the jackpot is confirmed or the reach is not established and the complete deviation is confirmed in the 5th pseudo-variation. Or, after the pseudo stop of the detachment, the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is confirmed.

Although the details will be described later, various detailed fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-ren are prepared so that such a "role" is given in the pseudo-ren (details related to the pseudo-ren are shown in FIG. 11 for the fluctuation pattern. -See FIG. 13). Further, as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach is established increases. That is, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, various pseudo-reams are selected as detailed fluctuation patterns for each of the fluctuation B and the fluctuation C, and the pseudo-ream is selected for each type of the pseudo-ream. By setting the selection probability (appearance probability) in the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a, as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, the expectation of a big hit when the reach is established increases.

By giving the number of pseudo-variations a role as shown in FIG. 8, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the variation display by the pseudo-ream is performed, the larger the number of pseudo-variations performed during the one variation display, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be when the reach is established. Similarly, the more the pseudo-variation is repeated during the display of one variation, the more the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases, and the player is more interested in the game. be able to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that even after five pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, a deviation may occur. As a result, even if the lottery results in a loss, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (variation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds in the present embodiment) as the fluctuation pattern, and the voice lamp. In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, it is possible to perform a variation display of a pattern in which the pseudo variation is performed five times during the long variation time (55 seconds) to finally completely deviate. And, the number of pseudo fluctuations of 5 is also the pseudo-ream with the highest expectation that it will be a big hit when the reach is established. In other words, if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (fluctuation F) is selected at the time of deviation, the deviation will be complete after the number of pseudo fluctuations (5 times), which is the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established. , The player can continue to raise the expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot will be a big hit during the process leading to the deviation even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream. Therefore, even if the deviation due to the pseudo-ream is repeated, the player can continue the game happily by having a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

In addition, even after 5 pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variations may be disengaged even after the pseudo-variations are repeated. It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be lengthened. In other words, in the conventional pseudo-ream, the probability of being out of order decreases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. I had to do it. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-ream, the variation may occur. The time can be extended to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5, the player is configured to have the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established, so that the player undergoes 5 pseudo fluctuations. Even if it becomes a complete deviation, it is possible to raise the expectation that a reach will be established and a big hit will be established by repeating pseudo fluctuations in the process leading to the deviation, and it will not be a pain to approach the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display fluctuations by pseudo-reams that are out of alignment after 5 pseudo fluctuations, and the purpose is to entertain the game without causing the player to worry too much about the small number of starting prizes. The average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the average fluctuation time of one time by causing the pseudo-ream to occur frequently while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when the reach is established after five pseudo fluctuations is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth pseudo-variation is started, the player plays the game with the expectation that the specific type of reach (special reach) will be established by the fifth pseudo-variation. Can be done. Moreover, since the specific type of reach is the special reach with the highest expectation of being the biggest hit, the expectation that the special reach will be established will further raise the feelings of the player. Therefore, even if the result of the fifth pseudo-variation results in a complete deviation, the player is allowed to play the game without getting bored and increasing the interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-variation ends before the most expected pseudo-variation number (5 times) when the reach is established (when the pseudo-variation number is 3 or 4 times), at least the reach is established. Moreover, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4, even if it is out of order, it will always reach, so the player expects to be a big hit until a definite display is made in the fluctuation display. You can keep feeling. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest to the end. In addition, when the reach is not established and the deviation occurs (complete deviation), the number of pseudo fluctuations is only 5 times, so that the pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4. However, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit with a predetermined probability, and even if the number of pseudo fluctuations is small, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in knowing the pseudo-ren. In addition, when the pseudo-ream is completely out of alignment, the number of pseudo-variations is always five. Therefore, even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream, it is possible to maximize the expectation that the player will be able to reach and become a big hit in the process of reaching the deviation. Therefore, the player can be fully entertained even if the pseudo-ream completely deviates.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the "role" in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is given to 5 times does not reach as the final fluctuation pattern and the complete deviation is confirmed, but also the final fluctuation pattern. It does not reach, but once it stops pseudo-stopping with a symbol that is off, but after that, it includes the "role" that the jackpot is confirmed by re-variation, so it is complete after 5 pseudo-variations. Even if the out-of-order symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that the jackpot may be confirmed by re-variation until the confirmation display is made. In other words, even if the pseudo-ren is completely out of order, the player can continue to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the completely out-of-order symbol is confirmed and displayed. You can entertain until the end.

Further, as described above, the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation does not end or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo-variations. As a result, in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, so that the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In addition, as in the past, it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo-ren ends with the second pseudo-variation and becomes out of place, so the player is given the impression that the pseudo-ren is just a time-earning effect. Giving can be suppressed. Furthermore, when a story-like effect is given to the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-ream, the effect is such that the story can be understood in the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to perform an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, the effect contents of the pseudo-ream (display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect when the pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally enters the reach, and FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram in which the pseudo-variation is performed four times. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content when finally entering the reach, and FIG. 9 (c) shows the effect content when the pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times and finally enters the reach. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. Further, FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect content when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally the pseudo-variation is completely deviated, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram in which the pseudo-variation is 5 It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect when the game is performed a number of times, the missed symbol is temporarily stopped by the fifth pseudo-variation, and then the re-variation is performed to determine the jackpot.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the pseudo-ream in the present embodiment is performed by a fighting game in which a character on the player side and a character on the opponent side (pachinko machine 10 side) compete in a fighting game. When the first pseudo-variation is started, the effect of starting the fighting-type fighting game is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the pseudo-stop, and the effect is switched to the fighting-type fighting effect. Then, a fighting game is played for each pseudo-variation.

In this fighting-type fighting game, when the pseudo-variation is pseudo-stopped, the off-design is displayed as a pseudo-stop, and the face of the player's character is displayed with a sad expression. Then, the characters "CONTINUE" are displayed on the screen to inform the player that a rematch will be performed, the next pseudo-variation is started, and the player-side character and the opponent-side character are battle-type. The fighting game resumes. After this fighting game and the display at the time of pseudo stop are repeatedly performed over a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations, in the final pseudo fluctuation, the effect content determined for each pseudo series is displayed.

It should be noted that the switching from the normal production to the fighting type fighting production may be performed at the time of the pseudo stop of the first pseudo fluctuation. For example, a character on the player side may be suddenly beaten by a character on the other side and display the characters "CONTINUE" to switch to a fighting game production.

For example, in the pseudo-ream in the case where the pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally enters the reach, as shown in FIG. 9A, the pseudo-stop display of the off symbol is performed in the first two pseudo-variations. At the same time, after the player's character loses the match and a sad face is displayed, and the "CONTINUE" display announces that the match will be rematched, the reach is established in the third pseudo-variation. At the same time, a face on which the player's character is pleased to win the match is displayed, and a "CONTINUE" display is used to announce that the match will be rematched. After that, it becomes normal reach, super reach, or special reach, and the fighting type fighting game according to each reach is played again. Then, in the case of a big hit, the character on the player side is displayed to win and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the big hit production is started as it is. In addition, in the case of a loss, the player's character is displayed to lose, and the missed symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In the pseudo-ream when the pseudo-variation is performed four times and finally enters the reach, the same pseudo-ream effect as when the pseudo-variation is performed three times is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first three pseudo-variations, a pseudo-stop display of the off-symbol is performed, and a face on which the player's character loses the battle and is sad is displayed, and "CONTINUE" is displayed. After the effect of notifying that the rematch will be performed is performed by the display, in the fourth pseudo fluctuation, the face on which the player's character wins the match and is pleased with the establishment of the reach is displayed, and "CONTINUE" is displayed. The display will indicate that a rematch will be held. Here, when the pseudo-variation is performed four times and finally enters the reach, as described above, it has a "role" of at least super reach but is determined. Therefore, after that, it becomes a super reach or a special reach, and the fighting type fighting game corresponding to each reach is performed again. Then, in the case of a big hit, the character on the player side is displayed to win and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the big hit production is started as it is. In addition, in the case of a loss, the player's character is displayed to lose, and the missed symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the pseudo-ream when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally rushes into the reach, the same pseudo-ream effect as when the pseudo-variation is performed 3 or 4 times is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the first four pseudo fluctuations, a pseudo stop display of the out-of-order symbol is performed, a face on which the player's character loses the battle and is sad is displayed, and "CONTINUE" is displayed. After the effect of notifying that the rematch will be performed is performed by the display, in the fifth pseudo-variation, the face on which the player's character wins the match and is pleased with the establishment of the reach is displayed, and "CONTINUE" is displayed. The display will indicate that a rematch will be held. Here, when the pseudo-variation is performed five times and finally the reach is reached, as described above, it has a "role" that makes it a special reach and further determines that it will be a big hit. Therefore, after that, it becomes a special reach, and the fighting type fighting game according to each reach is played again. Then, the character on the player side is displayed to win, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot production is started as it is.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-ream when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally the pseudo-variation is completely deviated, as shown in FIG. 10A, the pseudo-stop display of the deviated symbol is performed for the first 4 pseudo-variations. At the same time, the player's character loses the match and a sad face is displayed, and the "CONTINUE" display is used to announce that the match will be rematched. Furthermore, even in the fifth pseudo-variation, the pseudo-stop display of the out-of-order symbol is performed, the face on which the player's character loses the battle and is sad is displayed, and the rematch is performed by the "CONTINUE" display. A production to announce is performed. After that, the pseudo stop state is displayed for a few seconds, but the character on the player side collapses and cannot get up, the display is displayed as it is, "GAME OVER" is displayed, and then the completely off symbol is confirmed and displayed. ..

Further, in the pseudo-ream in which the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times, the missed symbol is temporarily stopped by the 5th pseudo-variation, and then the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 10 (b). In the same way as when the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally the pseudo-variation is completely off, the pseudo-stop display of the off-design is performed and the character on the player side loses the match and is sad. The face is displayed, and the "CONTINUE" display is used to announce that a rematch will be held. Then, even in the fifth pseudo-variation, the pseudo-stop display of the out-of-order symbol is performed, the face on which the player's character loses the battle and is sad is displayed, and the rematch is performed by the "CONTINUE" display. A production to announce is performed. After that, for a few seconds, while the pseudo-stop state is displayed, the character on the player side collapses and cannot get up, and the "GAME OVER" display is also performed as it is. However, in the production by this pseudo-ren, after that, the character on the player side who has collapsed rises up, and the character on the other side is defeated by reversal, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-ren is produced as a fighting-type fighting production by the fighting-type fighting game, so that the pseudo-ren can have a story. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the pseudo-ren with the story, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, in the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment, the fluctuation is not terminated or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo-variations, and the pseudo-variations are continuously performed at least three times. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the story of the pseudo-ren by the first and second pseudo-variations. Therefore, even if the pseudo-ren is executed with a story-like effect, the content can be presented to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can be more easily absorbed in the story.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream in the case where the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally completely deviated (that is, in the case of FIG. 10A) and the pseudo-variation are performed 5 times, and the fifth time. In the case where the missed symbol is temporarily stopped due to the pseudo-variation, then the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is confirmed (that is, in the case of FIG. 10B), the pseudo-stop for the fifth pseudo-variation is performed. The exact same production will be performed until it is displayed (until "GAME OVER" is displayed). Therefore, even if the completely out-of-order symbol is displayed as a pseudo-stop after the pseudo-variation is performed five times, the confirmation display is made with the expectation that the jackpot may be confirmed by the re-variation after that. Until then, the player can keep it. Therefore, even if the pseudo-ren is completely out of order, the player can continue to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the completely out-of-order symbol is confirmed and displayed. You can entertain until the end.

Further, in the effect by this pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, a countdown display is performed at the lower right of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This countdown display is a display in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is counted down from the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations (5 times in the present embodiment), "5" is displayed in the first pseudo fluctuation, and then the pseudo fluctuation (5 times). Alternatively, the value decreases by 1 each time the fighting game) is repeated. By displaying the countdown in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of pseudo fluctuations in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, as the value of the countdown display becomes smaller, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases, so that the player can gradually raise the expectation for the jackpot along with the countdown display. Therefore, this countdown display makes it easier for the player to be absorbed in the production by the pseudo-ream.

The face of the player's character who loses the battle and is sad, which is displayed at the time of the pseudo stop, may be changed every time the pseudo stop is repeated. For example, the expression of sadness may be gradually deepened. As a result, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be made stronger and bigger by losing. In addition, when the reach is established by the fourth pseudo-variation than when the reach is established by the third pseudo-variation, the face displayed when the reach is established is that the character on the player side wins the match and is pleased. The face may be made larger and more happy, and the case where the reach is established by the fifth pseudo-variation is displayed when the reach is established than the case where the reach is established by the fourth pseudo-variation. , The face on which the player's character is pleased to win the match may be made larger and more pleased. As a result, the player's facial expression that is displayed when the reach is established makes the player's facial expression happy, and the more the pseudo-variation is performed and the reach is established, the higher the expectation of a big hit is. Can appeal to others. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

Next, referring to FIGS. 11 to 13, fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds), fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds), fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds), and fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds) are the main components. The time flow of each detailed fluctuation pattern that can be selected by the voice lamp control device 113 when instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the control device 110 will be described. Needless to say, the temporal flow of each detailed fluctuation pattern described here is an example, and is not limited to this. In addition, the fluctuation D (variation time 7 seconds) and fluctuation E (variation time 10 seconds) instructed in the case of complete deviation, and the 2R fluctuation (variation time 59 seconds) instructed in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot will eventually be applied. However, since the pseudo-ream is not performed and the fluctuation is only performed by a well-known fluctuation pattern (a pattern in which the stop display is displayed after high-speed fluctuation), the description of their temporal flow is omitted.

First, FIG. 11A is a time chart showing the normal reach selected when the fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. When variation A is indicated, one detailed variation pattern is selected from a plurality of normal reach. As shown in FIG. 11A, these normal reach fluctuates at high speed for 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and fluctuates due to normal reach for 20 seconds after the reach is established 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Is performed, and 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, a confirmation display of a big hit or a miss is made.

Next, FIG. 11B is selected when the fluctuation F (fluctuation time 55 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, “pseudo fluctuation is performed 5 times and finally reach is reached. It is a time chart which shows "pseudo-ream (5 times pseudo-variation + deviation)" (pseudo-ream of FIG. 10A) that rushes into. When the variation F is instructed, the pseudo-ream of "5 times pseudo variation + deviation" is always selected as the detailed variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 11B, in this pseudo-ream, high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variation) is performed for 10 seconds after the fluctuation is started, and 10 seconds after the fluctuation is started, the pseudo-stop of the detached symbol is temporarily performed. Will be. Then, the high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variation) is performed again for 10 seconds, and then the pseudo-stop of the detached symbol is performed again. After this high-speed fluctuation (pseudo fluctuation) and the pseudo stop of the missed symbol are performed 5 times, it gives a feeling of excitement as to whether the miss is confirmed or a big hit within 50 to 55 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. As an effect given to the player, an effect showing whether or not the character on the player side collapses and gets up is displayed. Then, 55 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the completely deviated symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Next, FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (e) are time charts showing detailed fluctuation patterns selected when fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, respectively. 12 (a) shows a time chart showing super reach, and FIG. 12 (b) shows "pseudo-ream (3 times pseudo-ream + normal reach) in which pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally rushes into normal reach. 12 (c) is a time chart showing "pseudo-ream (three-time pseudo-ream + super-reach) in which pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally enters super reach", FIG. 12 ( d) is a time chart showing "pseudo-ream (three-time pseudo-ream + special reach) in which pseudo-variation is performed three times and finally enters special reach", and FIG. 12 (e) shows "pseudo-variation is 5". It is a time chart which shows "pseudo-ream (5 times pseudo-variation + resurrection)" when it is performed once, the missed symbol is temporarily stopped by the fifth pseudo-variation, and then re-variation is performed and the jackpot is confirmed.

When variation B is instructed, the detailed variation pattern is selected from a plurality of super reach, or "3 times pseudo variation + normal reach", "3 times pseudo variation + super reach", " One is selected from "3 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach" and "5 times pseudo fluctuation + resurrection".

With the exception of some exceptional super reach (for example, super reach with re-fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the super reach is a high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds after the fluctuation is started. After that, reach is established. Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, and the fluctuation develops into the super reach 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation by super reach is performed for 30 seconds, and 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a confirmation display of a big hit or a miss is made.

As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the pseudo-ream by "three pseudo-variations + normal reach" is performed after the high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variations) for 10 seconds and the pseudo-stop of the missed symbol are repeated twice. High-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds is performed again, and then reach is established (30 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 30 seconds, and 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a confirmation display of a big hit or a miss is made.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), the pseudo-ream by "three-time pseudo-variation + super-reach" is performed after the high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variation) for 10 seconds and the pseudo-stop of the missed symbol are repeated twice. , The high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds is performed again, and then the reach is established (30 seconds after the fluctuation starts). Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 10 seconds, and the fluctuation develops into the super reach 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation by super reach is performed for 20 seconds, and 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a confirmation display of a big hit or a miss is made.

As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the pseudo-ream by "3 times pseudo-variation + special reach" is the same as "3 times pseudo-variation + super reach" shown in FIG. 12 (c) for 40 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. Fluctuation production progresses with the flow. Then, 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, it develops into a special reach. After that, the fluctuation by special reach is performed for 20 seconds, and 60 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the jackpot confirmation display is made.

As shown in FIG. 12 (e), in the pseudo-ream by "5 times pseudo fluctuation + resurrection", the fluctuation effect proceeds in the same flow as "5 times pseudo fluctuation + deviation" for 50 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Next, as a production that gives the player a feeling of excitement such as whether the deviation is confirmed or a big hit within 50 seconds to 55 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, it is shown whether or not the character on the player side collapses and gets up. The effect is displayed, and within 55 to 60 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the character on the player side rises up to win the character on the other side, and the symbol is re-variated. Then, 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Next, FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (d) are time charts showing detailed fluctuation patterns selected when fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, respectively. 13 (a) is a time chart showing a special reach, and FIG. 13 (b) is a pseudo-ream (4 times pseudo-ream + super) in which the pseudo-variation is performed four times and finally enters the super reach. Time chart showing "reach)", FIG. 13 (c) is a time chart showing "pseudo-ream (4 times pseudo-ream + special reach) in which pseudo-variation is performed 4 times and finally enters special reach". Reference numeral 13 (d) is a time chart showing "pseudo-ream (5 times pseudo-ream + special reach) in which the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times and finally enters the special reach".

When variation C is instructed, the detailed variation pattern is selected from a plurality of special reach, or "4 times pseudo variation + super reach", "4 times pseudo variation + special reach", One is selected from "5 times pseudo fluctuation + special reach".

With the exception of some exceptional special reach (for example, super reach with re-variation), the special reach is a high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds after the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 13 (a). After that, reach is established. Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, the fluctuation develops into the super reach 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and further develops into the special reach 60 seconds after the fluctuation starts. After that, the fluctuation by special reach is performed for 30 seconds, and 90 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the jackpot confirmation display is made.

As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the pseudo-ream by "4 times pseudo-variation + super reach" is performed after the high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variation) for 10 seconds and the pseudo-stop of the missed symbol are repeated three times. , The high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds is performed again, and then the reach is established (40 seconds after the fluctuation starts). Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 20 seconds, and the fluctuation develops into the super reach 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation by super reach is performed for 30 seconds, and 90 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a confirmation display of a big hit or a miss is made.

As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the pseudo-ream by "4 times pseudo-variation + special reach" is the same as "4 times pseudo-variation + super reach" shown in FIG. 13 (b) for 60 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Fluctuation production progresses with the flow. Then, 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, it develops into a special reach. After that, the fluctuation by special reach is performed for 20 seconds, and 60 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the jackpot confirmation display is made.

As shown in FIG. 13 (d), the pseudo-ream by "5 times pseudo-variation + special reach" is performed after 10 seconds of high-speed fluctuation (pseudo-variation) and pseudo-stop of the missed symbol are repeated 4 times. , The high-speed fluctuation for 10 seconds is performed again, and then the reach is established (50 seconds after the fluctuation starts). Then, after the reach is established, the fluctuation by the normal reach is performed for 10 seconds, and 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a special reach. After that, the fluctuation by special reach is performed for 30 seconds, and 90 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the jackpot confirmation display is made.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (d) and 13 (a), (c), and (d), when the game develops into a special reach, it is configured to be a big hit without fail, but it is expensive. It may be configured so that while it is a big hit with a probability, it may be a miss.

As described above, the pseudo-ream when the reach is established after three pseudo-variations ("3 times pseudo-variation + normal reach", "3 times pseudo-variation + super reach", "3 times pseudo-variation + special reach") Is selected when variation B (variation time 60 seconds) is notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The pseudo-ream (“4 times pseudo-variation + super reach”, “4 times pseudo-variation + special reach”) when the reach is established after 4 times of pseudo-variations is changed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is selected when the fluctuation time (variation time 90 seconds) is notified. The pseudo-reach (“5 times pseudo-variation + special reach”) when the special reach is established after 5 pseudo-variations and the jackpot is confirmed is changed C (variation time 90 seconds) by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. ) Is notified, it is selected. The pseudo-ream (“5 times pseudo-variation + deviation”) when the complete deviation is confirmed after 5 times of pseudo-variation is when the fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds) is notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. Is selected. Then, after 5 pseudo-variations, the pseudo-ream ("5 times pseudo-variation + resurrection") when the missed symbol is temporarily stopped by the 5th pseudo-variation and then re-variated and the jackpot is confirmed is , It is selected when the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) is notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 32) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see SX2004 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33).

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice output device 113 changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 226, the lamp display device 227 is controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The vibration sensor 228 is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) like a conventional game machine. , ROM 22) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598 is not provided and stored, but is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. .. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. Further, the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 is resident in which the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the video RAM 235 for normal use or the video RAM 236 for normal use.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed in the third symbol without being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the device 81 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the number of parts can be increased. It is possible to suppress an increase in the failure rate due to the above.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) is executed.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , Fixed value data used in the control program (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later), by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of NAND flash memory 234a), work RAM 233. It is programmed to transfer to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer processing, the time required for the boot processing can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all used. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see FIG. 34 (a)) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 34 (a)) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed (FIG. 34 (Fig. 34). Set the start address of the program corresponding to (see S2202) in a).

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is provided with at least a main image area 235a when the power is turned on, a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. ..

Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a is from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 34A).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 15, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 15 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 15B. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and a "○" as shown in FIG. 15 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit", the image shown in FIG. 15 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "off", the image shown in FIG. 15 (c) is displayed in the variation effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

The MPU 231 used the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 was transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the drawing of the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. it can.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 264 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 16 and 17 are explanatory views for explaining the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 16 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and FIG. 17 is for the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". They are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 16, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, the rear image on the back surface C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 17 with the passage of time. Displayed on device 281. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17A, an orange sky indicating a sunrise is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 17A, and the back images of FIGS. 17A to 17C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 16A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 17 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) excluding FIG. 17 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'or the range of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b). It is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 17A to 17B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is changed with the passage of time. be able to. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 17 (b) to 17 (c) and 17 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236, FIG. 17 (a) is shown. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 17 (b) to (c) and 17 (c) to (a) can be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Since the images can be transferred to, the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 17 (b) to (c) and 17 (c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. it can.

On the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 14) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which it is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as in the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10, similarly to the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify 114. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a timing counter. It has at least 233i, a stored image discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a main control. For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on the command from the device 110, it is displayed by the additional data table and the display data table that describe the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in the production.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a demo effect. , A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, the final display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. This is the effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect of emphasizing the miss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this final display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

Further, the restart effect is centered on the predetermined position when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. This is an effect of displaying an image obtained by vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect, the final display effect, and the restart effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Further, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match in the variation display data table, for example, variation A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the stop symbol of the detachment is instructed by the main control device 110 when the effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for hitting. This special variation causes the third symbol to be variablely displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and the confirmation command is received. In accordance with the above, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", or "1" in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the line on the main control device 110. There is a risk that it will not be possible to correctly reflect the results of the lottery and perform variable effects and final display effects. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233g is added by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, then The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233 g, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. It includes the concept of displaying another effect on top of that one effect, changing the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in one effect. ..

That is, the additional data table is the drawing content required to add and display an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. , The drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in the one effect are defined. Is.

In the present embodiment, a continuous notice is additionally displayed for the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from the main control device 110. The case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, in response to the continuous advance notice effect that is additionally set for the variable effect. Specifically, the "bubble" and "tamago" that are the display modes of the continuous advance notice effect. , "Chicken", "Chicken", and "Chicken group" are stored in the data table storage area 233b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing contents, the type of the sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the rotation angle are defined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, for two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) in association with the address "0907H" defined in the display data table, respectively. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 19).

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 19 in the example of FIG. 19). In "00FDH"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, drawing corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the additional data table is drawn. The contents are described.

When the MPU 231 receives a continuous warning command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous warning mode indicated by the continuous warning command from the data table storage area 233b, and reads an additional data table of the work RAM 233 described later. It is stored in the buffer 233e. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image content to be drawn next.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g becomes "097H", the MPU 231 is specified in the address "0907H" of the additional data table in various sprites specified in the address "097H" of the display data table. Each sprite of the effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", it is determined that there is no display object to be added because the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is determined. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites specified in "0001H". Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example). , In the example of FIG. 19, even when the pointer 233g indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table, and the drawing contents specified by the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table are used. The image as specified is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like 3 When displaying another effect image (for example, continuous notice effect image) in addition to the effect image (for example, variable effect image) to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, another effect to be additionally displayed. By setting the additional data table corresponding to the image in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, like this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to other production images is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data table corresponding to various kinds of effect modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting the data table buffer 233e, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e While updating the pointer 233g every hour from the table, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer can be easily specified, and one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily specified from these. Can be generated in. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed should be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from a small number of data tables.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In addition, in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, in the example of FIG. 20). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be specified and described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Is acquired and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233g becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on the basis, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 34 (a)) (see S2205 in FIG. 34 (a)). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 46 (b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 35), and the simple image display flag is displayed. When 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 35 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 35 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 46 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional data table buffer 233e is additionally displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect (continuous notice effect, etc.). The MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and temporarily writes the Bull data, which means that there is no display object to be added to the additional data table buffer 233e, to display the data table. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. If there is an effect that determines the presence or absence and additionally displays it, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

Then, the MPU 231 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e and the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233g one by one. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, since the All data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

The transfer data table buffer 233f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233 g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while adding the pointer 233 g one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233g is a drawing content or a transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. Data transfer This is to specify the address from which data information should be acquired. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S2403 in FIG. 35). (See), the pointer update process (see S2711 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is added one by one.

The MPU 231 has an address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e each time the pointer 233g is updated. A predetermined sprite that should start transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while specifying the drawing contents specified in 1 and creating a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later. Acquires the transfer data information of the image data of, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. .. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and an additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the contents of (for example, a hold image that displays a hold ball number symbol, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) Is generated, and the drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table and the contents of other images. It is generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 can be adjusted according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (see FIG. 35). Each time the display setting process of is executed, the timekeeping counter 233i is decremented by 1 (see S2713 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The storage image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

The stored image discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 34 (a)) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3216 in FIG. 47). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3217 in FIG. 47). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 48).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 48).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first explained, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899, 99, 99, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, respectively.

After executing the start winning process, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the variation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1204, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110). Is greater than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number). N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c toward the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area 203c in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd area. → The data in each area is shifted in the order of hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, , Determining whether or not the demo is in progress (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This process ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 28) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the demo effect according to the demo command.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the fluctuation display is not started when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demo effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. 24. That is, by the processing of S1206, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type. Depending on the value of the counter C2, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and blue are lit when the 15R normal jackpot is reached. Turn on the LED. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S1213) to confirm the process, and this process ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

Next, the fluctuation start processing (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S1207). This fluctuation start processing (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , "Big hit" or "missing" lottery (win / fail determination), and determine the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, "7,307,582" associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random number value, and the pachinko machine When the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298," which is associated with the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a, "322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892" is the jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. Determine.

Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the jackpot time is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the 15R probability variation jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 2. The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether it is a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a round jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is stopped in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as.

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of big hit is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that it is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1305). The determination of this fluctuation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a high probability state, during a time reduction, or a low probability state excluding the time reduction), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, and the fluctuation type counter CS1. This is performed based on the value of and the deviation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). To.

Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a starting winning. , The hold processing of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the permission determination process of starting the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 are executed from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (the number of hold balls N of the variable effect held in the main control device 110) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, if there is no winning in the first ball opening 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening 64, the number of pending balls N <4 (S1402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry port 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is added to the free hold area of the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1404).

Next, the number of reserved balls N updated by the processing of S1403, and the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c by the processing of S1404. Create a hold ball number command including (S1405), set the created hold ball number command (S1406), end the start winning process, and return to the timer interrupt process. This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of reserved balls N included in the held ball number command, and various counters included in the held ball number command. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1611 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. 28, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the mouth) 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1706, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 26 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1712), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1918 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 30), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1918. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1918 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1918. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1918 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the data shifts to S1808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1918, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1918 is executed (see S1917 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1810, the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that when the processing of S1808 is reached via the processing of S1804 to S1806, the processing of S1804 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes of S1902 to S1911. In the process of S1901, it is the process of S1902 to S1912 related to the display and sound settings (that is, the setting of the effect) that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1913 and the command determination process of S1914 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1914 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1913 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1914 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1907 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring the input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether or not the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and an alarm sound is set to be output from the voice output device 226 (S1953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of the vibration error is set for the control device 114 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30). As a result, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 30, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1909), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. If the alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 31) (see S1953), the alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is voiced. It is output from the output device 226.

After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911), and then the counter update process is performed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the process of S1913. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated in this counter update process. The detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (99), and then returning to 0.

In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable display process, which is the process set for transmission. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, after the variation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1914). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

When the processing of S1914 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1919), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1916: No), the process returns to the process of S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1914). This command determination process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, this process also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuations A to F and 2R fluctuations) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (SX2002), and the process returns to the main process. .. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command, and the variation effect is produced by the third symbol display device 81 according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (SX2003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (SX2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (SX2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 233 (S2005).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (SX2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball count command is held by the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the process of S2008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize The value of the reserved ball counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, the display control device 114 executes the process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbol according to the reserved ball number.

After that, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous notice determination process, the value of the number of reserved balls received from the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are used. It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect image is continuously displayed over the variable effect held at the present time. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, whether the continuous advance notice effect mode is the same effect type continuous advance notice effect mode in which the same image (for example, a "bubble" image) is displayed across a plurality of variable effects. , Display related images in order each time a variable effect is performed (for example, display each image in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "chicken group") Step-up type continuous notice effect Decide whether to use the mode.

Specifically, the determination of whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect is made when the hold ball number command is transmitted based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. The result of the lottery performed in response to the reserved balls held in (1) and the stop type after the fluctuation effect are estimated, and the estimation result is performed based on the estimated result and the number of reserved balls held at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the variation effect is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-back out-of-reach reach, it may be determined that the continuous advance notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, in this case, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that the continuous advance notice effect may be performed.

In addition to this, if the estimated lottery result is a big hit, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability regardless of the stop type, and the lottery result is out of order. However, when the stop type is reach, that is, when it is presumed that the reach is out of front and back and the reach is other than out of front and back, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, the conditions for determining the continuous advance notice effect may be appropriately set according to the playability of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, as the continuous advance notice effect mode, the conditions of the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the continuous advance notice effect mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired at the time of starting winning is set by the hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device. Notifying 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous advance notice effect based on the values of the various counters notified by the hold ball number command and the value of the number of hold balls. Do. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, the execution conditions of the continuous advance notice effect can be set in various modes.

Further, the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 with one command for the number of reserved balls. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of the various counters acquired with the start winning and the number of reserved balls at the time when the starting winning is detected. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the number of reserved balls to which the continuous advance notice effect is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the control in the voice lamp control device 113 is facilitated as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. be able to.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2006 (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2010), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913). This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, and a display stop type for transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control unit 114. This is a process of generating a command and setting the generated display variation pattern command and display stop type command to be transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the fluctuation effect, and the display hold ball number command is set and generated in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated hold ball number. When a decision is made to perform a continuous advance notice effect on the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display variation pattern command, a continuous advance notice command is set after the display variation pattern command.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the SX2002 processing of the command determination processing (see FIG. 32). The variation pattern type (any of the variation A to F, 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b is read out, and the details are based on the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223b, the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a. Fluctuation pattern is determined (S2104).

Only the fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, but according to this S2104, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time is specified. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

Here, in order to realize the pseudo-ream given the role as shown in FIG. 8, a plurality of super reach as detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected in this S2104 with respect to the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds). In addition, "3 times pseudo-variation + normal reach" pseudo-ream, "3 times pseudo-variation + super reach" pseudo-ream, "3 times pseudo-variation + special reach" pseudo-ream, "5 times pseudo-variation + resurrection" Pseudo-ream is available. Further, for the fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds), as detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected in this S2104, in addition to a plurality of special reach, a pseudo series by "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" and "4 times pseudo". Pseudo-ream by "variation + special reach" and pseudo-ream by "5 times pseudo-variation + special reach" are prepared. Further, for the fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds), as a detailed fluctuation pattern selected in this S2104, a pseudo series of "5 times pseudo fluctuation + deviation" is prepared.

Then, as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach is established increases. Thereby, by using the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a, the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b and the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103. , The pseudo-ream having the role shown in FIG. 8 can be realized, and as the number of pseudo-variations increases, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit when the reach is established can be increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following effects are obtained by generating such a pseudo-ream. That is, when the variation display by the pseudo-ream is performed, the larger the number of pseudo-variations performed during the one variation display, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be when the reach is established. Similarly, the more the pseudo-variation is repeated during the display of one variation, the more the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases, and the player is more interested in the game. be able to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that even after five pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, a deviation may occur. As a result, even if the lottery results in a loss, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (variation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds in the present embodiment) as the fluctuation pattern, and the voice lamp. In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, it is possible to perform a variation display of a pattern in which the pseudo variation is performed five times during the long variation time (55 seconds) to finally completely deviate. And, the number of pseudo fluctuations of 5 is also the pseudo-ream with the highest expectation that it will be a big hit when the reach is established. In other words, if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (fluctuation F) is selected at the time of deviation, the deviation will be complete after the number of pseudo fluctuations (5 times), which is the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established. , The player can continue to raise the expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot will be a big hit during the process leading to the deviation even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream. Therefore, even if the deviation due to the pseudo-ream is repeated, the player can continue the game happily by having a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

In addition, even after 5 pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variations may be disengaged even after the pseudo-variations are repeated. It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be lengthened. In other words, in the conventional pseudo-ream, the probability of being out of order decreases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. I had to do it. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-ream, the variation may occur. The time can be extended to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5, the player is configured to have the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established, so that the player undergoes 5 pseudo fluctuations. Even if it becomes a complete deviation, it is possible to raise the expectation that a reach will be established and a big hit will be established by repeating pseudo fluctuations in the process leading to the deviation, and it will not be a pain to approach the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display fluctuations by pseudo-reams that are out of alignment after 5 pseudo fluctuations, and the purpose is to entertain the game without causing the player to worry too much about the small number of starting prizes. The average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the average fluctuation time of one time by causing the pseudo-ream to occur frequently while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when the reach is established after five pseudo fluctuations is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth pseudo-variation is started, the player plays the game with the expectation that the specific type of reach (special reach) will be established by the fifth pseudo-variation. Can be done. Moreover, since the specific type of reach is the special reach with the highest expectation of being the biggest hit, the expectation that the special reach will be established will further raise the feelings of the player. Therefore, even if the result of the fifth pseudo-variation results in a complete deviation, the player is allowed to play the game without getting bored and increasing the interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-variation ends before the most expected pseudo-variation number (5 times) when the reach is established (when the pseudo-variation number is 3 or 4 times), at least the reach is established. Moreover, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4, even if it is out of order, it will always reach, so the player expects to be a big hit until a definite display is made in the fluctuation display. You can keep feeling. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest to the end. In addition, when the reach is not established and the deviation occurs (complete deviation), the number of pseudo fluctuations is only 5 times, so that the pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4. However, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit with a predetermined probability, and even if the number of pseudo fluctuations is small, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in knowing the pseudo-ren. In addition, when the pseudo-ream is completely out of alignment, the number of pseudo-variations is always five. Therefore, even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream, it is possible to maximize the expectation that the player will be able to reach and become a big hit in the process of reaching the deviation. Therefore, the player can be fully entertained even if the pseudo-ream completely deviates.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the "role" in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is given to 5 times does not reach as the final fluctuation pattern and the complete deviation is confirmed, but also the final fluctuation pattern. It does not reach, but once it stops pseudo-stopping with a symbol that is off, but after that, it includes the "role" that the jackpot is confirmed by re-variation, so it is complete after 5 pseudo-variations. Even if the out-of-order symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that the jackpot may be confirmed by re-variation until the confirmation display is made. In other words, even if the pseudo-ren is completely out of order, the player can continue to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the completely out-of-order symbol is confirmed and displayed. You can entertain until the end.

Further, as described above, the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation does not end or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo-variations. As a result, in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, so that the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In addition, as in the past, it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo-ren ends with the second pseudo-variation and becomes out of place, so the player is given the impression that the pseudo-ren is just a time-earning effect. Giving can be suppressed. Furthermore, when a story-like effect is given to the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-ream, the effect is such that the story can be understood in the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to perform an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

In the present embodiment, in the process of S2104, whether or not a decision is made to perform a continuous advance notice effect by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32) for the variation effect that determines a detailed variation pattern in the process. Regardless of this, the variable effect by the pseudo-ream is also configured to be selectable, but if it is decided to perform the continuous advance notice effect for the variable effect, the variable effect by the pseudo-ream is not selected. May be good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated and difficult to understand by performing the variable effect by the pseudo-ream and the continuous advance notice effect in combination.

When a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed fluctuation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set to send to (S2105).

Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, selects a stop symbol suitable for the stop type, and confirms and displays the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command. Display the selected stop symbol.

Next, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the hold ball is consumed (that is, the change display corresponding to the hold ball is set) in accordance with the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command. (S2107), a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the holding ball number indicated by the value of the updated holding ball number counter 223a is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not a decision is made to perform a continuous advance notice effect by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32) for the variation effect corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the process of S2105. (S2109), if it has been decided to perform the continuous advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), a continuous advance notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set (S2110). , End this process and return to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if the decision to perform the continuous advance notice effect is not made (S2109: No), the variation display process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the continuous advance notice command set by the process of S2110 is additionally displayed in addition to the variable effect according to the continuous advance notice effect mode determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32). Continuous notice image types (one of "foam", "egg", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") are included. When the display control device 114 receives the continuous advance notice command, the display control device 114 adds a continuous advance notice image of the type indicated by the continuous advance notice effect command to the variation effect performed based on the previously received display variation pattern command, and has a third symbol. The process is executed so as to be displayed on the display device 81.

In the process of S2109, if the variation effect corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the process of S2105 is a pseudo-ream, the process unconditionally branches to S2108: No, and the continuous notice command setting process (S2110). ) May be skipped. Even with this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming complicated and difficult to understand by performing the variable effect by the pseudo-ream and the continuous advance notice effect in combination.

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 315 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start. Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 use a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) as in a conventional game machine. Instead of being provided and stored, it is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2211). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2212, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2212, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 34) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 34 (a)) (S2215), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 81. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 34 (b), the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211 executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2212. It may be part of a boot program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process set in the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process of setting the start address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2211. And, after repeating the process of S2212 a plurality of times, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed without performing the processes of S2211 and S2212. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

The description will be continued by returning to FIG. 34 (a). When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initially set, and processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 46 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer the image is executed (see S3002 in FIG. 46A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 15 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)). The determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 35 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 35 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. The command determination process (S2402) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and then the display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and corresponds to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. When the continuous advance notice command is stored, the continuous advance notice additional data table according to the continuous advance notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect and the continuous advance notice effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image corresponding to the mode. Can be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

In the display setting process (S2403), the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), which are determined in the task process (S2404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front / rear deviation reach, reach other than front / rear deviation) The stop type table corresponding to (completely off) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. , The simple command determination process (S2408) is executed in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81, and then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed to process S2404. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command For all the unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display reserved ball number command (S2504: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a). FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the hold ball count command processing, first, the new hold ball count command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2403) that the display hold ball count command has been processed in the on state is turned on (S2601), and then the display hold ball count command is turned on (S2601). Acquire the reserved ball number information included in the ball number command (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

As a result, in the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is set. Is developed so that the reserved image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S2504 (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a confirmation command for display (S2506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the confirmation command processing (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), this processing is terminated, and the command is determined. Return to processing. As a result, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is started so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. To execute. Further, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed and the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display setting process is executed so as to be performed.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S2506 (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S2506: No). If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (c). FIG. 37C is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the demo command processing (S2509), first, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2621). Next, it is necessary to clear the contents by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233e, and in the demo display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Since the drawing of the image is specified so that the image is not drawn, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, the Full data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear the contents (S2622). ).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag shown is set to off, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2625), the demo command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S2624, from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2621. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table is measured by using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the state of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, when it is determined by the time measurement of the display setting control metering counter 233i that the demo effect in the demo display data table has been completed, the next effect to be displayed. As a result, control is performed so that the demo effect is displayed again.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of S2508 (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d (S2631).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Set the table in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is given from the main control device 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player changes the restart effect. It can be visually recognized as a part of the effect, and the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed without any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233e (S2633).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table of is set to off (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d to set the display data table corresponding to the special variation as described later.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233i (S2635). Initialize the pointer 233g to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638). And return to the command judgment process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, and the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631 is executed. Extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by S2632. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variation display data table is used in advance from the character ROM 234 for normal use. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233i in which the variation time data is set by the process of S2635, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation is confirmed within a predetermined time after the variation effect is completed. If the command (display confirmation command) cannot be received, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display is used. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is no longer performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so that the confirmation command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the confirmation command for display can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is no longer performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demo command is rewritten to the variable display data table by overwriting as in the process of S2631. Can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2510 (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S2512), if there is a display variable type command (S2511: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variable type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front-rear reach, non-front-rear reach, or complete loss) indicated by the display stop type command. The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and the third symbol is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the display device 81 is finally set (S2642).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2643).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is described as. In the above-mentioned task process (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

After the processing of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644) to end this stop type command processing, and the process returns to the command determination processing. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the above variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d as described later.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2642.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off, and the player There is a risk that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be misunderstood as a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a big hit, the completely disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2512 (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous warning command among the unprocessed commands (S2512: No). S2514), if there is a continuous notice command (S2514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the continuous advance notice command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing continuous advance notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes the process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the continuous notice command processing, first, a new continuous notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, an additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type (any of "bubble", "tamago", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notice command is determined. , The determined additional data table for continuous advance notice is read from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

As a result, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is opposed to the continuous effect corresponding to the continuous advance notice additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S2652. The display content of the next one frame of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the advance notice effect is additionally displayed.

After that, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuous advance notice image types corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types are turned on. The notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), the continuous advance notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous advance notice command flag set by the process of S2651 is turned on, it is said that a predetermined additional data table for continuous advance notice is set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the continuous advance notice command process. Judgment is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the process of S2653. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous advance notice type.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no continuous advance notice command in the processing of S2514 (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). ), If there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (b). FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2661). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S2662 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command in the processing of S2516 (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands (S2516: No). S2518), if there is a frame button operation command (S2518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2519), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the frame button operation command processing (S2519) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing. This frame button operation command process executes a process corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the on state is set to on (S2671), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variable display data table based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2671. When is detected, the process of updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. As a result, the player can select his / her favorite super reach effect.

Returning to FIG. 36, when it is determined that there is no frame button operation command in the processing of S2518 (S2518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2521), and the process returns to the processing of S2501.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2681). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2682). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2682 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2682 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Returning to FIG. 36, if it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2520 (S2520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern. Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command is the confirmation command processing (see FIG. 37 (b)), the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 38 (a)), and the stop type. A command process (see FIG. 38 (c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 38A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2631. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2701: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S2702), S2703 to S2710. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2703), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is for display in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the hold ball number command has been processed, and the hold image setting process is executed (S2704).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 43A. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In this reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls symbols notified from the voice lamp control device 113 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the reserved ball number command for display. This is a process for developing image data.

In the hold image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is set to the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). ) Is expanded (S2751). In the task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the reserved image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new hold ball number command is set to off (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 41, after the hold image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2703: No), then , It is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S2706).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S2761).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 41, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S2707). Then, if the frame button operation flag is on (S2707: Yes), the frame button operation process is executed (S2708).

Here, the details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (c). FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation process. In this process, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach, the super reach to be displayed is displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting an aspect.

In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to off (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the variation set in the previously executed V interrupt process. When the image controller 237 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen based on the display data table, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that this super reach selection screen is displayed only when a normal super reach is instructed as a detailed fluctuation pattern, and is not displayed when a super reach is established in the pseudo-ream.

Then, in the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the processing of S2772 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of super reach is displayed. Among them, the super reach type flag is updated so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are set to off according to a predetermined order (S2773). Return to the display setting process.

In the present embodiment, when the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player in the variable display data table is specified, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is specified for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach with the super reach type flag turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

Returning to FIG. 41, when it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, is off after the frame button operation process (S2708) or in the process of S2707 (S2707: No), then the comparison is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (S2709). Then, if the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

Here, the details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process changes when the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the display change pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent. In order to change the effect to a special variable effect that displays the third symbol in a high-speed variable manner until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process of.

In the comparison process, first, among the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set in the ON state is specified, and from the specified data table discrimination flag, the variation stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The type of the display data table is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set in the ON state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table specified by the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for fluctuations is prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and each fluctuation pattern includes for off, 15R fixed jackpot / time saving jackpot shared, 15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, and so on. ··and so on. Therefore, in the processing of S2783, for example, even though the fluctuation display data table corresponds to the fluctuation pattern for deviation, if the stop symbol is set as the jackpot symbol, it is determined that these do not match. ..

If it is determined in the process of S2783 that a match is made (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2788, the comparison flag is set to off (S2788), and then the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no match (S2783: No), first, the display data table for special variation in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table are set. By writing the Null data to each of the buffers 233f, their contents are cleared (S2784).

Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, the symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to off (S2785), and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2786). As described above, the special variation effect changes the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is to be displayed, the effect time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, in the time counter 233i, 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 9000 is set as the time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect.

Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to off (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In this way, if the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, it is special. Since the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the special stop symbol is set. Can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the main control device. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 110 cannot be correctly reflected to perform the variable effect or the final display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Returning to FIG. 41, after the comparison process (S2708) or in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S2711. To do.

In S2711, the pointer update process is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process performs the corresponding drawing contents or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 g (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 233g is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that each of them is ordered from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233g by the processing of S2791, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information. Is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (S2793), and the demo display data table or restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S2794), and further, it corresponds to the effect time of the demo display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counting counter 233i (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2977. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demo effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2793, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 233 g is used. The value is subtracted by 1 (S2996), and the process proceeds to S2977. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S2792, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the processing of S2791 is not End information, S2793 to S2795 The process of S2797 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2797.

In the processing of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2797), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2977: No), the pointer update processing is terminated and the display is set. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer In the display data buffer set to 233d, the value of the pointer 233g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored (S2798), and the value of the timing counter is set to 1. (S2799), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 41, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawn contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S2712 together with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Further, when the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared by the Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter g is subtracted by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, when the value of the time counter 233i is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively (S2716). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, after setting the confirmation command flag to off (S2719) and then setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state to on (S2720), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are used as they are in the work RAM 233. It is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table. From the start of to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2404), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S2721 and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the processing of S2715 (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2722 shown in FIG. 42, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). ). If the confirmation display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the confirmation display effect is completed, so the confirmation display flag is set to off. Later (S2723), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S2725). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing contents can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the branching condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are both changed by the processing of S2716. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S2722, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S2728). If the demo display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demo production has ended. Therefore, the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2728, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are filled with full data. By writing, the contents are cleared (S2731). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2732), the value of the pointer 233 g is initialized to 0 (S2733), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the display control device, a confirmation command (confirmed command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner of vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to swing and display at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect of repeatedly vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table is caused to swing the third symbol at least once. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2716 shown in FIG. 44 is performed and the display data table buffer is performed. A definite display data table is set in 233d. As a result, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is made with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2631 in FIG. 38A is performed and the display data is displayed. A variation display data table is set in the table buffer 233d, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a display demo command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2621 in FIG. 37 (c) is performed and the display data table is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) originally received from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed due to the end of the variation effect. Since it is an effect displayed in some cases, the confirmation command may not be received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, and the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is also the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is completed, It is stipulated that one image (one of FIGS. 15B and 15C) of the fluctuation image when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Further, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be originally received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is not recognized after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is completed. Is performed to set the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the variation effect of the variation image when the power is turned on is restarted as it is.

Further, in the comparison process, the fluctuation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if they do not match, the symbol is removed as a stop symbol (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15). c) See).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3001 (S3001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3102). In the process of S3102, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. When it is determined by the process of S3102 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3102: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3103. Further, as a result of the processing of S3101, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3103 (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 36 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 36 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S3001: No in FIG. 46 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3202), and if it is the transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

Further, in the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3206).

In the process of S3206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3207. Further, as a result of the processing of S3205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3205: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3207.

In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3208), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209).

Then, if the new continuous notice command flag is on (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after the new continuous advance notice command flag is set to off (S3210), among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the image data of the continuous advance notice image corresponding to the continuous advance notice determination flag in the ON state. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S3211), and the specified various types are specified. After using the image data of the sprite indicated by the information as the transfer target image, the process proceeds to S3216.

In the process of S3209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but off (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3212: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3213), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is specified (S3214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is used as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S3216.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3216, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216). The discrimination in the processing of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If it is determined that the sprite is stored and the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3216, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process ends as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3216 (S3216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3217, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated (S3218), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is set to "on", and the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is set. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are supposed to be stored to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command is supported. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous preview image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 transfers to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by executing the normal image transfer setting process. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. ..

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S3301). That is, in the processing of S3301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). Then, the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S3302 (S3303). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the following "role" is given to each number of pseudo-variations performed during one variation display in the pseudo-ream. ing. First, the pseudo-variation is always performed three times or more. That is, the fluctuation does not end or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo fluctuations, and the pseudo-ream always continues. Then, when the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed three times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "3 times", the reach (normal reach, super reach, or special reach) is the final variation pattern. Is confirmed, and the "role" that the probability of becoming a big hit is high is given. When the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed four times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "4 times", the final variation pattern is at least super reach (that is, super reach or special reach). It is confirmed that the probability of winning a jackpot is even higher than in the case of the pseudo-variation number of "3 times".

Further, when the pseudo-variation performed during one variation display is performed 5 times, that is, when the number of pseudo-variations is "5 times", the following three "roles" are given. The first is the "role" that determines that the final fluctuation pattern will be a special reach and a big hit. The second is the "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern is not reach, but complete deviation is confirmed. The third is the "role" in which the final fluctuation pattern does not reach, but once a pseudo stop is made with a missed symbol, but then re-variation is performed to determine the jackpot. In other words, if the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times during the display of one variation, whether the special reach is established and the jackpot is confirmed or the reach is not established and the complete deviation is confirmed in the 5th pseudo-variation. Or, after the pseudo stop of the detachment, the re-variation is performed and the jackpot is confirmed.

Then, in the first embodiment, in order to realize the pseudo-ream given such a role, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected in this S2104 with respect to the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) are used. In addition to Super Reach, "3 times pseudo-variation + normal reach" pseudo-ream, "3 times pseudo-variation + super reach" pseudo-ream, "3 times pseudo-variation + special reach" pseudo-ream, "5 times pseudo-variation +" A pseudo-ream by "Resurrection" is prepared. Further, for the fluctuation C (variation time 90 seconds), as detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected in this S2104, in addition to a plurality of special reach, a pseudo series by "4 times pseudo fluctuation + super reach" and "4 times pseudo". Pseudo-ream by "variation + special reach" and pseudo-ream by "5 times pseudo-variation + special reach" are prepared. Further, for the fluctuation F (variation time 55 seconds), as a detailed fluctuation pattern selected in this S2104, a pseudo series of "5 times pseudo fluctuation + deviation" is prepared.

Then, as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach is established increases. Thereby, by using the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a, the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223b and the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103. , The pseudo-ream having the role shown in FIG. 8 can be realized, and as the number of pseudo-variations increases, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit when the reach is established can be increased.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, the following effects are obtained by generating such a pseudo-ream. That is, when the variation display by the pseudo-ream is performed, the larger the number of pseudo-variations performed during the one variation display, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be when the reach is established. Similarly, the more the pseudo-variation is repeated during the display of one variation, the more the player can feel that the possibility of becoming a big hit increases, and the player is more interested in the game. be able to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is configured so that even after five pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, a deviation may occur. As a result, even if the lottery results in a loss, the main control device 110 selects a long-time fluctuation pattern (variation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds in the present embodiment) as the fluctuation pattern, and the voice lamp. In the control device 113 and the display control device 114, it is possible to perform a variation display of a pattern in which the pseudo variation is performed five times during the long variation time (55 seconds) to finally completely deviate. And, the number of pseudo fluctuations of 5 is also the pseudo-ream with the highest expectation that it will be a big hit when the reach is established. In other words, if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (fluctuation F) is selected at the time of deviation, the deviation will be complete after the number of pseudo fluctuations (5 times), which is the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established. , The player can continue to raise the expectation that the reach will be established and the jackpot will be a big hit during the process leading to the deviation even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream. Therefore, even if the deviation due to the pseudo-ream is repeated, the player can continue the game happily by having a sense of expectation that is a big hit.

In addition, even after 5 pseudo-variations, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variations are repeated in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variations may be disengaged even after the pseudo-variations are repeated. It can be said that the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display can be lengthened. In other words, in the conventional pseudo-ream, the probability of being out of order decreases as the number of pseudo-variations increases. I had to do it. Therefore, the fluctuation time was also about 30 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even after the pseudo-variation is performed 5 times, which is the maximum number of times the pseudo-variation is repeated in the pseudo-ream, the variation may occur. The time can be extended to about 55 seconds. Moreover, as described above, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5, the player is configured to have the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established, so that the player undergoes 5 pseudo fluctuations. Even if it becomes a complete deviation, it is possible to raise the expectation that a reach will be established and a big hit will be established by repeating pseudo fluctuations in the process leading to the deviation, and it will not be a pain to approach the deviation. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display fluctuations by pseudo-reams that are out of alignment after 5 pseudo fluctuations, and the purpose is to entertain the game without causing the player to worry too much about the small number of starting prizes. The average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the average fluctuation time of one time by causing the pseudo-ream to occur frequently while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the type of reach performed when the reach is established after five pseudo fluctuations is limited to a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Therefore, when the fifth pseudo-variation is started, the player plays the game with the expectation that the specific type of reach (special reach) will be established by the fifth pseudo-variation. Can be done. Moreover, since the specific type of reach is the special reach with the highest expectation of being the biggest hit, the expectation that the special reach will be established will further raise the feelings of the player. Therefore, even if the result of the fifth pseudo-variation results in a complete deviation, the player is allowed to play the game without getting bored and increasing the interest in the game. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-variation ends before the most expected pseudo-variation number (5 times) when the reach is established (when the pseudo-variation number is 3 or 4 times), at least the reach is established. Moreover, it is configured to be a big hit with a predetermined probability. As a result, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4, even if it is out of order, it will always reach, so the player expects to be a big hit until a definite display is made in the fluctuation display. You can keep feeling. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's interest to the end. In addition, when the reach is not established and the deviation occurs (complete deviation), the number of pseudo fluctuations is only 5 times, so that the pseudo fluctuation ends when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 4. However, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit with a predetermined probability, and even if the number of pseudo fluctuations is small, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in knowing the pseudo-ren. In addition, when the pseudo-ream is completely out of alignment, the number of pseudo-variations is always five. Therefore, even in the case of a complete deviation in the pseudo-ream, it is possible to maximize the expectation that the player will be able to reach and become a big hit in the process of reaching the deviation. Therefore, the player can be fully entertained even if the pseudo-ream completely deviates.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the "role" in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is given to 5 times does not reach as the final fluctuation pattern and the complete deviation is confirmed, but also the final fluctuation pattern. It does not reach, but once it stops pseudo-stopping with a symbol that is off, but after that, it includes the "role" that the jackpot is confirmed by re-variation, so it is complete after 5 pseudo-variations. Even if the out-of-order symbol is displayed, the player can continue to have the expectation that the jackpot may be confirmed by re-variation until the confirmation display is made. In other words, even if the pseudo-ren is completely out of order, the player can continue to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the completely out-of-order symbol is confirmed and displayed. You can entertain until the end.

Further, as described above, the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation does not end or the reach is established by the first and second pseudo-variations. As a result, in the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-variation is always performed three or more times, so that the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened. In addition, as in the past, it is possible to suppress or avoid the fact that the pseudo-ren ends with the second pseudo-variation and becomes out of place, so the player is given the impression that the pseudo-ren is just a time-earning effect. Giving can be suppressed. Furthermore, when a story-like effect is given to the pseudo-variation that is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-ream, the effect is such that the story can be understood in the first and second pseudo-variations in which the pseudo-variation is continued. By displaying, it is possible to perform an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the display control device 114 determines the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the effect mode of the effect is determined, the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Further, an additional data table corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed according to another command from the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and then in the display data table buffer 233d. Drawing of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the set display data table, the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. And the case of controlling the transfer of the image data used for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 have been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effect of the effect on the third symbol display device 81 determined according to the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. A display data table corresponding to the mode, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table, and an additional data table corresponding to an effect to be additionally displayed according to another command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. A composite data table is generated by synthesizing and is set in the composite data table buffer 251d, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is drawn according to the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. And the transfer of the image data used for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the display control device 114 is provided with the work RAM 251 instead of the work RAM 233. Further, among the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35A) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the demo command processing (S2509) and the variation pattern command processing (S2509), which are one of the command determination processing (S2402). S2511) and continuous notice command processing (S2515), display setting processing (S2403), comparison processing (S2710) which is one processing of the display setting processing, and normal image transfer setting which is one processing of transfer setting processing (S2405). The partial treatment included in the treatment (S3003) is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. The other processing executed by the MPU 231 of the above is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 49, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment. As described above, as shown in FIG. 49, the display control device 114 in the present embodiment is provided with the work RAM 251 in place of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 251 is composed of a DRAM like the work RAM 233 in the first embodiment. Then, in the work RAM 251 the program storage area 251a, the data table storage area 251b, the simple image display flag 251c, the composite data table buffer 251d, the pointer 251g, the drawing list area 251h, the time counting counter 251i, the stored image discrimination flag 251j, and the drawing target. At least the buffer flag 251k is provided. Of these, the program storage area 251a, the data table storage area 251b, the simple image display flag 251c, the pointer 251g, the drawing list area 251h, the time counting counter 251i, the stored image discrimination flag 251j, and the drawing target buffer flag 251k are each first implemented. It has the same configuration and function as the program storage area 233a, data table storage area 233b, simple image display flag 233c, pointer 233g, drawing list area 233h, timing counter 233i, stored image discrimination flag 233j, and drawing target buffer flag 233k in the form. It is a thing.

For example, the data table storage area 251b is displayed based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, similarly to the data table storage area 233b in the first embodiment. In addition to the effect, a display data table (see FIG. 18) describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time and one effect based on a command from the voice lamp control device 113 are added. In contrast to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is used in an additional data table (see FIG. 19) that describes the display contents to be displayed over time and one effect displayed by the display data table. Of the image data, transfer data information for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 236 and a transfer data table (see FIG. 20) that defines the transfer timing are stored. Area. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

The composite data table buffer 251d is a composite data table corresponding to an effect mode of displaying on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The composite data table includes a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an additional data table corresponding to the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect. It is generated by synthesizing the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table.

Here, the details of the composite data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a synthetic data table. In the composite data table, the time indicated by the address corresponding to the time in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit is associated with the address. Image content (drawing content) for one frame to be displayed in, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is also specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, the composite data table is provided with a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area for each address. The display data table area of each address is associated with the same address as the address specified in the composite data table in the display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address is transcribed as it is. For example, the display data table area of the composite data table address "0001H" is associated with the display data table address "0001H" corresponding to the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content to be displayed at the time indicated by the address "0001H" is posted as it is.

In the additional data table area of each address of the composite data table, the composite data table in the additional data table corresponding to the effect added to the effect corresponding to the display data table for posting the drawing contents to the display data table area. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed in addition to the time indicated by the address, which is associated with the same address as the address specified in, is transcribed as it is.

For example, in the additional data table area of the composite data table address "097H", at the time indicated by the address "097H", which is associated with the address "0907H" of the additional data table corresponding to the added effect. The drawing content to be added is posted as it is. If the Null data is specified in the composite data table address "0001H" posted in the composite data table area, the Null data remains in the transfer data table area of the composite data table address "0001H". Posted.

If the effect to be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table for posting the drawing contents to the display data table area has not been determined, it should be added to the composite data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table. Null data, which means that the display does not exist but does not exist, is described.

In the transfer data table area of each address of the composite data table, in the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for posting the drawing contents to the display data table area, the same address as the address specified in the composite data table is associated. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data whose transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address is posted as it is. If the one address in the transfer data table specifies the Bull data that means that there is no image data to be transferred corresponding to that address, the one in the composite data table. The Null data is also posted to the transfer data table area of the address as it is.

For example, the transfer data table area of the composite data table address "0001H" is associated with the transfer data table address "0001H" corresponding to the display data table posted in the display data table area. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data whose transfer should be started at the time indicated by "0001H" is posted as it is. If Null data is specified in the transfer data table address "0907H" corresponding to the display data table posted in the display data table area, the transfer data table area of the composite data table address "097H" However, the Null data is posted as it is.

If the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for posting the drawing contents is not prepared in the display data table area, all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is resident. Since it is stored in the video RAM 235 for transfer and means that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use is unnecessary, the transfer target image to be transferred to the transfer data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table. Null data is described, which means that the data does not exist.

The MPU 231 provides an effect mode for the third symbol display device 81 to execute in response to a command (display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like received from the main control device 110. Once determined, the display data table corresponding to the effect mode and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table are extracted from the data table storage area 251b. Then, the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted display data table is displayed in the display data table of the same address in the composite data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be transferred to the area and the transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted transfer data table is transferred to the same address in the composite data table. By posting to the transfer data table area, a composite data table that combines the display data table and the transfer data table is generated. Then, the generated synthetic data table is set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d.

At this point, the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has not been determined. Therefore, when generating this composite data table, Null data is added to the additional data table area of all the addresses. Write it down. If the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for posting the drawing contents is not prepared in the display data table area of the composite data table, as described above, the transfer data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table The composite data table is generated by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data to be transferred to.

The MPU 231 is a command different from the command in which the effect mode of the effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and is a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 (in the present embodiment, continuous). When the effect to be added to the effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in response to the notice command), the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be added is extracted from the data table storage area 251b. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted additional data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Post by overwriting to the additional data table area at the same address in the composite data table. As a result, the drawing content of the effect to be added is added to the additional data table area of the composite data table previously generated by the display data table and the transfer data table.

Further, the MPU 231 initializes the pointer 251g when the generated composite data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Then, after adding 1 to the pointer 251 g each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251 g are obtained from the composite data table stored in the composite data table buffer 251d. The image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the above, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite specified in the transfer data table area of the address and to start the transfer at that time. Is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 gives an image controller 237 a drawing instruction for the image and an image data transfer instruction. If Null data is specified in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer data information is not included in the drawing list. , The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237.

As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table and the additional data table according to the update of the pointer 251 g, so that the image as specified by the display data table and the additional data table is displayed in the third symbol display device. It is displayed at 81. Further, according to the update of the pointer 251g, a process of transferring the image data of the predetermined sprite from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command or a continuous notice command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used for generating the composite data table, instead of changing the above.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the display control device 114 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of the effect images. In addition, since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing the enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable production images will be limited. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used for generating the composite data table. Therefore, it is possible to display various types of effect images on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the effect mode to be displayed, and the composite data table is generated according to the generated composite data table. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. is there. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. Therefore, as described above. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the effect mode to be displayed, and this is set in the composite data table buffer 251d. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set synthetic data table is an effect mode in which the pachinko machine 10 displays in advance on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It can be realized only based on the configuration that determines.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined as an additional data table corresponding to the other effect to be additionally displayed when displaying another effect in addition to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the drawing content is added to the additional data table buffer area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the effect can be easily added to the base effect mode and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, like this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to other production images is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 251b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data table corresponding to various kinds of effect modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 251b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10, when other effects to be additionally displayed are defined as an additional data table and the display of other effects to be additionally displayed is decided, the original effect mode is supported. Since the drawing contents specified in the additional data table corresponding to other effects are added to the composite data table generated by the display data table and the transfer data table, the composite data set in the composite data table buffer 251d is added. Never regenerate the table from scratch. Therefore, it is possible to easily add and display the other effect image to be added and displayed to the original effect image.

Further, in the transfer data table, as described above in the first embodiment, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address so as to be stored in the area 236a, the image data is stored in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. By transferring from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table area of the composite data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite is transferred. , It can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table area of the composite data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 corresponds to the display data table as the display data table is extracted from the data table storage area 251b in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. Since the transfer data table to be transferred is extracted from the data table storage area 251b and a composite data table is generated by combining the extracted display data table and the transfer data table, the transfer timing of the image data to be transferred can be easily grasped. Can be controlled. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used for drawing the image performed according to the display data table area of the composite data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Therefore, in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

In addition, the additional data table and the transferred data table have the same data structure as the display data table, and in the additional data table, they are added at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. The drawing content of the image to be displayed is specified, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred is specified corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, a synthetic data table can be easily generated.

In addition, a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area are provided for each address of the composite data table, and the time indicated by the display data table area and the additional data table area of each address indicates the time. In addition to defining the drawing contents to be displayed in, the transfer data table area of each address defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by that address. Before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the area, the transfer start timing is specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Can be done. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, since it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect mode originally determined from one composite data table, the drawing content of the effect added later, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, the display data Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, the processing load required for the identification can be reduced.

Next, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a demo command process (S2509) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. As described above in the first embodiment, the demo command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is an audio lamp. When a demo command is received from the control device 113, the process corresponding to the demo command is executed.

In the demo command processing in the second embodiment, first, the drawing contents defined for each address of the demo display data table are transferred to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and the composite is performed. A composite data table is generated by writing Null data to the additional data table area and the transfer data table area of all the addresses of the data table (S3621). Then, the generated synthetic data table is set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d (S3622).

After that, the same processing as S2623 to S2625 of the demo command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set in the time counter 251i (S2623), and the pointer 251 g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag shown is set to off, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2625), the demo command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 251g initialized by the processing of S2624, the pointer from the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d by the processing of S3622. By extracting the drawing contents defined in the display data table area of the address shown in 251 g, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since Null data is written in the additional data table area and the transfer data table area, another effect is not added to the demo effect and displayed, and the image data used for the demo effect is a character. It is not transferred from the ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As for the demonstration production, drawing is performed using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2511). FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), as described above in the first embodiment, and is a main process. When a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the control device 110, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed.

In the variation pattern command processing in the second embodiment, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and a transfer data table corresponding to the variation display pattern data table are determined. (S3631). In this process, as in the process of S2631 of the variation pattern command process in the first embodiment, a part of the command is changed due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. If it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is determined. As a result, even when the fluctuation effect having a longer variation time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the variation effect according to the composite data table buffer 251d is completed. After that, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart effect as a part of the variation effect, and can continue to see the variation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the drawing contents specified for each address of the determined variable table display data table are posted to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and specified for each address of the determined transfer data table. By posting the transferred data information to the transfer data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and further writing the Null data to the additional data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table, the composite data Generate a table (S3632). Then, the generated composite data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d (S3633).

After that, the same processing as in S2634 to S2638 of the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table determined by the processing of S3631 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table of is set to off (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2634, which variation pattern is used for the variation display data table used to generate the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. It can be easily determined whether or not it corresponds to.

Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display data table used for generating the composite data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. If there is a contradiction, a composite data table is generated using the display data table corresponding to the special variation and set in the composite data table buffer 251d, as will be described later.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table used for generating the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d by the processing of S3633, time data representing the fluctuation time is measured. The counter 251i is set (S2635), and the pointer 251g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638). And return to the command judgment process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 251g initialized by the processing of S2636, from the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d by the processing of S3633, The drawing content defined in the display data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is indicated by the pointer 251g. The transfer data information of the transfer data table area specified in the address is extracted, and the image data of the sprite required for drawing the image specified in the display data table area is previously stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to. Since Null data is written in the additional data table area, the other effect is not displayed until another effect (continuous notice effect) is added to the variable effect.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the composite data table is measured by using the time counting counter 251i in which the variation time data is set by the process of S2635, so that the variation effect in the composite data table is completed. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation command (display) is displayed within a predetermined time after the variation effect is completed. If the confirmation command) cannot be received, the display setting can be controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the continuous advance notice command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2515). FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command processing. As described above in the first embodiment, the continuous notice command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is a voice. When a continuous warning command transmitted from the lamp control device 113 is received, the process corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed.

In the continuous notice command processing, the processing of S2651 and S2653 is the same as the processing of S2651 and S2653 of the continuous notice command processing in the first embodiment. Therefore, although detailed description of these processes will be omitted, in the continuous notice command processing in the second embodiment, first, a new continuous notification that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is notified to the transfer setting process (S2405). When the notice command flag is set to on (S2651), then the continuous notice image type (one of "bubble", "tamago", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notice command is set. The corresponding additional data table for continuous notice is determined, the determined additional data table for continuous notice is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the drawing contents specified in each address of the read additional data table for continuous notice are read. Is added to the additional data table area provided at the same address of the synthetic data table set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d (S3652).

As a result, in the display setting process, the process of S3652 is applied to the effect corresponding to the display data table posted in the display data table area provided at each address of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. , Next in the third symbol display device 81 so that the continuous notice effect corresponding to the additional data table for continuous notice added to the additional data table area provided at each address of the composite data table is additionally displayed. Specify the display content of the image for one frame of.

After that, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuous advance notice image types corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types are turned on. The notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), the continuous advance notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous advance notice command flag set by the process of S2651 is turned on, a predetermined additional data table for continuous advance notice is added to the composite data table buffer 251d by the continuous advance notice command process. Judgment is made, and the continuous advance notice type corresponding to the additional data table for continuous advance notice added to the composite data table buffer 251d is specified from the continuous advance notice determination flag set by the process of S2653. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous advance notice type.

Next, the display setting process (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the display setting process. As described above in the first embodiment, the display setting process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is a command determination process. Based on the contents of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d by the process (S2402) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specifically specified. is there. Further, in the display setting process, the pointer 251 g is also updated.

In the display setting process of the second embodiment, the processes of S3712, S3716, S3724, and S3731 are executed instead of the processes of S2712, S2716, S2724, and S2731 of the display setting process of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the processing of the other steps of the display setting processing in the second embodiment is the same as the processing of the steps with the same reference numerals in the display setting processing in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted here. To do. Hereinafter, the processes of S3712, S3716, S3724, and S3731, which are steps specific to the display setting process in the second embodiment, will be mainly described.

In this display setting process, the pointer update process is executed by the process of S2711, and when the pointer 251 g is updated, it is then updated by the pointer update process from the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. The drawing contents defined in the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251 g are expanded (S3712). In the task processing, sprites (display objects) that compose an image based on the drawing contents developed by the processing of S3712 together with the hold image previously developed by the processing of S2704 and the warning image developed by the processing of S2706. In addition to specifying the type of sprite, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. If Null data is described in the additional data table area, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added.

In the subsequent processing of S2713, similarly to the first embodiment, the value of the timekeeping counter g is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 251i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714), and the timekeeping is performed. When the value of the counter 251i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), the effect time corresponding to the display data table used to generate the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d has elapsed. Means. At this time, if the variable display data table is used to generate the composite data table, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114. The drawing contents specified for each address of the display data table are posted to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and the composite data table area and transfer data table of all the addresses of the composite data table are posted. By writing Null data to the area, a composite data table is generated, and the generated composite data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d (S3716). Then, the process proceeds to S2717.

As a result, when the composite data table generated from the variable display data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the main control device 110 is set via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the confirmation display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table posted in the display data table area of the composite data table to the confirmed display data table. it can. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Further, in the processing of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on (S2715: No), the process shifts to the processing of S2722 shown in FIG. 55, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state. It is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). If the confirmation display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the confirmation display effect is completed, so the confirmation display flag is set to off. Later (S2723), the drawing contents specified for each address of the demo display data table are posted to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and all the addresses of the composite data table are added. By writing Null data to the data table area and the transfer data table area, a synthetic data table is generated, and the generated synthetic data table is set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d (S3724). Then, the process proceeds to S2725.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing contents can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the processing of S2722, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the on state is on. (S2728). As a result, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variation effect, the composite data generated based on the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 as the table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d (S2729), and whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value. (S2730).

Then, when the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the drawing contents defined for each address of the restart display data table are set in the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table. Generates a composite data table by writing to the additional data table area and transfer data table area of all the addresses of the composite data table, and sets the generated composite data table in the composite data table buffer 251d. (S3731). Then, the process proceeds to S2732.

As a result, in the display control device, a confirmation command (confirmed command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

Next, the comparison process (S2710) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is executed when it is determined that the comparison flag is on in the above-mentioned display setting processes (FIGS. 54 and 56) (S2709: Yes), and is based on the display variation pattern command. , When the variable display data table used to generate the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, the fluctuation occurs. In order to change the effect to a special variable effect that displays the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process of.

As described above in the first embodiment, the fluctuation display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and each fluctuation pattern includes, for deviation, shared 15R fixed jackpot / time saving jackpot, and for 15R probability variation jackpot. For 2R probability change jackpot ... etc. Therefore, for example, when the stop symbol is set as the jackpot symbol even though the variation display data table corresponds to the deviation pattern, it is determined in the comparison process that these are inconsistent. ..

In the comparison process in the second embodiment, the process of S3784 is executed instead of the process of S2784 of the display setting process in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the processing of the other steps of the display setting processing in the second embodiment is the same as the processing of the steps with the same reference numerals in the display setting processing in the first embodiment. Omit. Hereinafter, the process of S3784, which is a step peculiar to the display setting process in the second embodiment, will be mainly described.

In this comparison process, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table specified by the process of S2781 and the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 match (S2783), and it is determined that they do not match. In the case (S2783: No), the drawing contents specified for each address of the special variation display data table are posted to the display data table area provided at the same address of the composite data table, and all of the composite data table. By writing Null data to the additional data table area and the transfer data table area of the address, a composite data table is generated, and the generated composite data table is set in the composite data table buffer 251d (S3784). Then, the process proceeds to S2785.

As a result, the variation display data table used to generate the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are displayed. If there is a contradiction, the composite data table is generated from the special variation display data table and set in the composite data table buffer 251d, so that the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed on the third symbol display device 81. A special variation effect is displayed. Then, as the stop symbol, the special stop symbol is set by the process of S2785, so that when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. , The special stop symbol can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the main control device. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 110 cannot be correctly reflected to perform the variable effect or the final display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process. As described above in the first embodiment, the normal image transfer setting process is a process executed in the transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)). While the simple image display flag 251c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information described in the transfer data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. A transfer instruction for transferring from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set.

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the address indicated by the pointer 251g updated by the display setting process (S2403, see FIG. 54) executed earlier. The information described in the transfer data table area provided in S4201 is acquired (S4201), and the process proceeds to S3202. Then, in the processing of S3202 to S3218, the same processing as the processing of S3202 to S3218 of the normal image transfer setting processing in the first embodiment is performed. Therefore, detailed description of these processes will be omitted.

As described above, in the display control device 114, a composite data table as shown in FIG. 50 is generated from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, and is set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and the transfer data described in the transfer data table area provided at the address indicated by the pointer 251 g of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image to the image controller 237 is set according to the information, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table area of the composite data table buffer 251d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video at a desired timing. It can be transferred to RAM 236.

Here, as in the first embodiment, the transfer data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the table, since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. By transferring to 236a, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table area of the composite data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a. Can be stored in. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table area of the composite data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Therefore, in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the command (display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like received from the main control device 110 When the effect mode to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined accordingly, the display data table corresponding to the effect mode and the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table are extracted from the data table storage area 251b. To do. Then, the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted display data table is displayed in the display data table of the same address in the composite data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be transferred to the area and the transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted transfer data table is transferred to the same address in the composite data table. By posting to the transfer data table area, a composite data table that combines the display data table and the transfer data table is generated. Then, the generated synthetic data table is set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d.

Further, when the effect to be added to the effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in response to another command (for example, continuous notice command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the effect is added. An additional data table corresponding to the effect to be output is extracted from the data table storage area 251b, and one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified for each address in the extracted additional data table. The content (drawing content) of the image is transferred by overwriting to the additional data table area of the same address of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d. As a result, the drawing content of the effect to be added is added to the additional data table area of the composite data table previously generated by the display data table and the transfer data table.

On the other hand, when the generated synthetic data table is set in the synthetic data table buffer 251d, the pointer 251g is initialized. Then, after adding 1 of 451 g each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the composite data table stored in the composite data table buffer 251d is added to the display data table area and the additional data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 251 g. The image content to be drawn next is specified based on the specified drawing content, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite specified in the transfer data table area of the address and to start the transfer at that time is used. Identify and create a drawing list (see FIG. 21). Then, by transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image and to transfer the image data.

As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table and the additional data table according to the update of the pointer 251 g, so that the image as specified by the display data table and the additional data table is displayed in the third symbol display device. It is displayed at 81. Further, according to the update of the pointer 251g, a process of transferring the image data of the predetermined sprite from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command or a continuous notice command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used for generating the composite data table, instead of changing the above.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the display control device 114 is changed like the conventional slot machine, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of the effect images. In addition, since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing the enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable production images will be limited. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table and the additional data table used for generating the composite data table. Therefore, it is possible to display various types of effect images on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the effect mode to be displayed, and the composite data table is generated according to the generated composite data table. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. is there. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. Therefore, as described above. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a composite data table is generated from the display data table according to the effect mode to be displayed, and this is set in the composite data table buffer 251d. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set synthetic data table is an effect mode in which the pachinko machine 10 displays in advance on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It can be realized only based on the configuration that determines.

In addition, a display data table area, an additional data table area, and a transfer data table area are provided for each address of the composite data table, and the time indicated by the display data table area and the additional data table area of each address indicates the time. In addition to defining the drawing contents to be displayed in, the transfer data table area of each address defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by that address. Before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the area, the transfer start timing is specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Can be done. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, since it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect mode originally determined from one composite data table, the drawing content of the effect added later, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, the display data Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, the processing load required for the identification can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exert the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 66. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a display data table describing display contents (drawing contents) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is used as a command from the voice lamp control device 113. Based on this, an additional data table is prepared for each effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an additional data table describing display contents (drawing contents) to be added to the effect mode displayed in the display data table is provided. , Prepared for each production mode of the effect that can be added, and further, for each display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for display (drawing) by the display data table. The case where the transfer data information for transferring the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 and the transfer data table defining the transfer timing are prepared has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the display data table prepared for each effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. Not only the display content (drawing content) to be added, but also the display content (drawing content) to be added is specified for each effect that can be additionally displayed for the production mode, and used for the display (drawing). Of the image data to be generated, the transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

Then, when the display control device 114 determines the effect mode of the effect in the third symbol display device 81 determined in response to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) received from the voice lamp control device 113, this determination is made. By setting the display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table buffer 452d, the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Controls the transfer of image data used for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Further, when the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to a predetermined condition, the drawing of the image to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also controlled in response to the determined effect. ..

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the display control device 114 is provided with a work RAM 452 instead of the work RAM 233. Further, among the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35A) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the demo command processing (S2509) and the variation pattern command processing (S2509), which are one of the command determination processing (S2402). S2511) and continuous notice command processing (S2515), display setting processing (S2403), comparison processing (S2710) which is one processing of the display setting processing, and normal image transfer setting which is one processing of transfer setting processing (S2405). The partial treatment included in the treatment (S3003) is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. The other processing executed by the MPU 231 of the above is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment. As described above, as shown in FIG. 58, the display control device 114 in the present embodiment is provided with the work RAM 452 in place of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 452 is composed of a DRAM like the work RAM 233 in the first embodiment. Then, in the work RAM 452, a program storage area 452a, a data table storage area 452b, a simple image display flag 452c, a display data table buffer 452d, a pointer 452g, a drawing list area 452h, a time counting counter 452i, a stored image discrimination flag 452j, and a drawing target. At least the buffer flag 452k is provided. Of these, the program storage area 452a, the simple image display flag 452c, the pointer 452g, the drawing list area 452h, the time counting counter 452i, the stored image discrimination flag 452j, and the drawing target buffer flag 452k are the program storage areas 233a in the first embodiment, respectively. , Simple image display flag 233c, pointer 233g, drawing list area 233h, time counting counter 233i, stored image discrimination flag 233j, drawing target buffer flag 233k, and so on. To do.

The data table storage area 452b describes the display content (drawing content) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time, and is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the conditions. Transfer data for defining the content (drawing content) and further transferring the image data used for the display (drawing) that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Information and its transfer timing are defined, and a display data table prepared for each effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the voice lamp control device 113 is stored. It is an area.

This display data table is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 together with the control program as a kind of fixed value data, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 192 after the system reset is released, and this data It is stored in the table storage area 452b. Then, when all the display data tables are stored in the data table storage area 452b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 452b. As described above, since the work RAM 192 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

Here, the details of the display data table in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of this display data table. In the display data table of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. One frame of image content (drawing content) that should be displayed at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address, and sprite image data that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address, that is, the transfer target. The transfer data information of the image data is also specified.

Similar to the display data table of the first embodiment, the drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite (rear image, effect, character, etc.) constituting the image for one frame, and also defines the type of the sprite. Drawing for drawing a display object on the third symbol display device 81, such as display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, according to the type of the display object. Information is specified.

On the other hand, as the transfer data information, as in the transfer data table of the first embodiment, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. , And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Further, as the transfer data information in which the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is the image data to be transferred, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is usually used by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the drawing contents. It is defined for a predetermined address so that it is stored in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

If there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address as the transfer data information. The total data to be used is specified (corresponding to the address "097H" in FIG. 59). Further, when all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, Null data is specified as the transfer data information at all the addresses.

Further, in the display data table in the third embodiment, one frame of images to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by each address for each effect that can be additionally displayed with respect to the effect mode corresponding to the display data table. (Drawing content) is defined as additional drawing content. This additional drawing content is indicated by the address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed for each address. The types of sprites (effects, characters, etc.) that make up the image to be additionally displayed at the time when the sprites are displayed are specified, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, etc. of the sprites are associated with each sprite type. Drawing information for drawing a display object on the third symbol display device 81, such as a semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined (for example, the address “097H”). In addition, in each effect that can be additionally displayed, if there is no image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address, the effect that the image to be additionally displayed does not exist is identified for that address. Information and additional drawing contents of the effect are not described. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of one display data table.

Similar to the display data table (see FIG. 18) in the first embodiment, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the final display data table is described. At the address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 59), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred and the additional drawing contents corresponding to the effects that can be additionally displayed are described.

When the MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 extracts a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 452b. Then, it is stored in the display data table buffer 452d and the pointer 452g is initialized.

Then, after adding 1 to 452 g each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452d is next drawn based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 452 g. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created by specifying the image content to be transferred and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at that time. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 gives an image controller 237 a drawing instruction for the image and an image data transfer instruction. If Null data is specified in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer data information is not included in the drawing list. , The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237.

Further, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, a plurality of additional display-capable effects specified in the display data table can be displayed. An additional drawing content corresponding to the determined effect is specified from among them, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created together with the normal drawing content. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image of the effect to be additionally displayed together with the image corresponding to the original effect mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed in response to a command from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command or a continuous notice command). The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the display control device 114 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of the effect images. In addition, since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing the enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable production images will be limited. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the set data table is followed. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. Is. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. Therefore, as described above. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the display data table is set according to the set display data table. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame is such that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the production mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It can only be realized based on this.

Further, since the additional drawing contents corresponding to all the effects that can be additionally displayed are defined in the display data table, the MPU 231 is added to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. In the case of displaying the effect of, it is possible to add another easily determined effect to the base effect mode and display it without resetting the display data table to the display data table buffer 452d.

Further, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which one additional effect image is superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared, but like this pachinko machine 10, additional drawing corresponding to all the effects that can be additionally displayed Since the contents are specified in the display data table, 32 types of display data tables may be prepared by separately specifying the data table corresponding to other production images as an additional data table, and the data table storage area. The capacity increase of 452b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data table corresponding to various kinds of effect modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 452b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, in the display data table, as described above in the first embodiment, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the drawing content. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address so as to be stored in 236a, the image data is stored in the image storage area from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information specified in the display data table. By transferring to 236a, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a. Can be left. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the display data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, not only the drawing contents but also the transfer data of the image data to be transferred are transferred to the display data table extracted from the data table area 452b in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. Since the information and the transfer timing are defined, the transfer timing can be easily and accurately grasped and controlled. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used for drawing the image performed according to the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the display data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Therefore, the transfer of the image data is performed for each sprite. It can be managed and controlled, and the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, for each address in the display data table, the drawing content to be displayed at the time indicated by that address is defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred is defined. Before the image data of the sprite is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the drawing content, the transfer data information, and the additional drawing content can be specified from one display data table, the drawing content, the additional drawing content, and the transfer data information can be specified from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, respectively. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for the specification as compared with the case of specifying the above. Further, since a display data table in which drawing contents, additional drawing contents, and transfer data information are defined is prepared in advance in the data table storage area 452b, a data table that defines drawing contents and data that defines additional drawing contents are prepared. Process by preparing a table and a data table that defines transfer data information, synthesizing each data table each time, and comparing with the case of specifying the drawing content and transfer data information from the combined data table. The load can be further reduced.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description of the work RAM 452 will be continued. The display data table buffer 452d is a buffer for storing the display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231 determines the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, and selects a display data table corresponding to the effect mode of the effect from the data table storage area 452b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 452d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 452g one by one to the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 452g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452d and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data. Based on this, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created for each frame, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at that time.

Further, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed in addition to the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined earlier, based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. Including the additional drawing contents corresponding to the determined additional drawing contents to be displayed among the additional drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 452g in the display data table buffer 452d stored in the display data table buffer 452d. Then, the above-mentioned drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created.

The work RAM 452 is also provided with an additional data flag. This additional data flag is provided corresponding to all the effects that can be added to the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and if there is an additional data flag in the ON state, the additional data flag is turned on. Indicates that the effect corresponding to the additional data flag of the state is set as an effect to be additionally displayed. This additional data flag is set to off as an initial value, and when a predetermined condition is met, the additional data flag corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed determined according to the condition is set to on. The flag. Then, when the additional display of the effect is finished, all the additional data flags are set to off.

Next, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a demo command process (S2509) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. As described above in the third embodiment, the demo command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is an audio lamp. When a demo command is received from the control device 113, the process corresponding to the demo command is executed.

In this demo command processing, first, as in the demo command processing in the first embodiment, a demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S2621), in the third embodiment, then, all the additional data flags provided in the work RAM 452 are set to off (S5622). As a result, in the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

After that, the same processing as S2623 to S2625 of the demo command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the timekeeping counter 452i (S2623), and the pointer 452g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag shown is set to off, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2625), the demo command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer is updated from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the processing of S2621 while updating the pointer 251g initialized by the processing of S2624. By extracting the drawing contents defined in the display data table area of the address shown in 452 g, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2511). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), as described above in the first embodiment, and is a main process. When a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the control device 110, the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, as in the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display is determined. The data table is read from the data table storage area 452b and set in the display data table buffer 452d (S2631). Then, in the third embodiment, all the additional data flags provided in the work RAM 452 are set to off (S56223). As a result, in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

After that, the same processing as in S2634 to S2638 of the variation pattern command processing in the first embodiment is executed. That is, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table determined by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table of is set to off (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d corresponds to. Can be judged.

Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. However, if there is a contradiction, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d as described later.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the processing of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 452i (S2635). Initialize the pointer 452g to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638). And return to the command judgment process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 452g initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, and the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the processing of S2631 is executed. Extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 452g, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data specified at that address. The image controller 237 so that the information is extracted and the sprite image data necessary for drawing the image specified in the variable display data table is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance. To control. While the additional data flag is off, the additional drawing content is ignored. Therefore, another effect is not displayed without being added.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 452i in which the variation time data is set by the process of S2635, so that the variation effect in the display data table is completed. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation command (display) is displayed within a predetermined time after the variation effect is completed. If the confirmation command) cannot be received, the display setting can be controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the continuous advance notice command processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described (S2515). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice command processing. As described above in the first embodiment, the continuous notice command process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is a voice. When a continuous warning command transmitted from the lamp control device 113 is received, the process corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed.

In the continuous notice command processing, the processing of S2651 and S2653 is the same as the processing of S2651 and S2653 of the continuous notice command processing in the first embodiment. Therefore, although detailed description of these processes will be omitted, in the continuous notice command processing in the second embodiment, first, a new continuous notification that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is notified to the transfer setting process (S2405). When the notice command flag is set to on (S2651), then the continuous notice image type (one of "bubble", "tamago", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notice command is set. The additional data flag corresponding to the effect indicated by the continuous preview image type is set to on, and the additional data flag corresponding to the other effect is displayed so that the corresponding effect is additionally displayed for the variable effect. Is set to off (S5652).

As a result, if there is an additional data flag that is turned on in the display setting process, the additional drawing content of the effect indicated by the turned on additional data flag is expanded, and the additional drawing content is included in the drawing list. .. Therefore, since the image controller 237 draws an image based on the drawing list including the additional drawing contents, the effect image indicated by the continuous notice type indicated by the turned-on additional data flag is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is added to the variation effect and displayed in 81.

After that, among the continuous advance notice determination flags provided for each continuous advance notice image type, the continuous advance notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type included in the continuous advance notice command is turned on, and the continuous advance notice image types corresponding to other continuous advance notice image types are turned on. The notice determination flag is set to off (S2653), the continuous advance notice command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Next, the display setting process (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the display setting process. As described above in the first embodiment, the display setting process is a process executed in the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)), and is a command determination process. Based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d by the process (S2402) or the like, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified. is there. Further, in the display setting process, the pointer 452 g is also updated.

In the display setting process according to the third embodiment, the processes S5712 to S5714 are executed instead of the process S2712 of the display setting process according to the first embodiment. Further, instead of the processing of S2716 and S2731 of the display setting processing in the first embodiment, the processing of S5716 and S5731 is executed. Since the processing of the other steps of the display setting processing in the third embodiment is the same as the processing of the steps with the same reference numerals in the display setting processing in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Hereinafter, the processes of S5712 to S5714, S5716, and S5731, which are steps specific to the display setting process in the second embodiment, will be mainly described.

In this display setting process, the pointer update process is executed by the process of S2711, and when the pointer 452 g is updated, then the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d is updated by the pointer update process. Of the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, the drawing contents excluding the additional drawing contents are expanded (S5712). Next, it is determined whether or not the additional data flags corresponding to all the additional displayable effects are on (S5713), and if it is off (S5713: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713. If any one of the additional data flags is turned on as a result of the determination in S5713 (S5713: No), the pointer 452g updated by the pointer update process from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Of the drawing contents of the address indicated by, the additional drawing contents corresponding to the effect type indicated by the additional data flag are expanded (S5714), and the process proceeds to S2713.

In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S5712 together with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined. When any one of the additional data flags is turned on, the sprites (displays) that compose the image include not only the drawing contents expanded by the processing of S5712 but also the additional drawing contents expanded by the processing of S5714. In addition to specifying the type of object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Therefore, when any one of the additional data flags is turned on, the additional drawing content of the effect indicated by the turned on additional data flag is included in the drawing list, and the image controller 237 adds this. By drawing the image based on the drawing list including the drawing contents, the effect image indicated by the turned on additional data flag is added to and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the subsequent processing of S2713, similarly to the first embodiment, the value of the timekeeping counter g is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 452i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714), and the timekeeping is performed. When the value of the counter 452i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114. The table is set in the display data table buffer 452d and all additional data flags are set off (S5716). Then, the process proceeds to S2717.

As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 452d, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table buffer 452d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281. Further, since all the additional data flags are set to off, in the final display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

Further, in the processing of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on (S2715: No), the process shifts to the processing of S2722 shown in FIG. 55, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state. It is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). Then, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the on state is on (S2728). As a result, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 452d in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

Then, when the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and all the additional data flags are set to off (S5731). Then, the process proceeds to S2732.

As a result, in the display control device, a confirmation command (confirmed command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time. Further, since all the additional data flags are set to off, in the restart effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed.

In the process of S2724, when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 452d, the additional data flag is not set to off, and the branch condition of S2722: Yes is confirmed. This is a case where the effect is being performed, and in this case, all the additional data flags are set to off by the processing of S5716. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of setting the additional data flag to off is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

Next, the comparison process (S2710) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process is executed when it is determined that the comparison flag is on in the above-mentioned display setting process (FIGS. 63 and 64) (S2709: Yes), and is based on the display variation pattern command. , When the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, the variation effect is produced via the voice lamp control device 113. This is a process for changing the third symbol to a special variation effect for displaying a variable display at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

As described above in the first embodiment, the fluctuation display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and each fluctuation pattern includes, for deviation, shared 15R fixed jackpot / time saving jackpot, and for 15R probability variation jackpot. For 2R probability change jackpot ... etc. Therefore, for example, when the stop symbol is set as the jackpot symbol even though the variation display data table corresponds to the deviation pattern, it is determined in the comparison process that these are inconsistent. ..

In the comparison process in the third embodiment, the process of S5784 is executed instead of the process of S2784 in the display setting process in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the processing of the other steps of the display setting processing in the third embodiment is the same as the processing of the steps with the same reference numerals in the display setting processing in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted here. To do. Hereinafter, the process of S5784, which is a step peculiar to the display setting process in the third embodiment, will be mainly described.

In this comparison process, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table specified by the process of S2781 and the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 match (S2783), and it is determined that they do not match. In the case (S2783: No), the display data table for special variation in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and all the additional data flags are set to off (S5784). Then, the process proceeds to S2785.

As a result, if the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, a special variation occurs. Since the display data table for use is set in the display data table buffer 452d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, as the stop symbol, the special stop symbol is set by the process of S2785, so that when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received. , The special stop symbol can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the main control device. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 110 cannot be correctly reflected to perform the variable effect or the final display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Further, since all the additional data flags are set to off, in the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, another effect is not added and is not displayed. In particular, in the special variation effect, the stop symbol may be a special stop symbol, and in order to emphasize the peculiarity of the variation effect, it is not appropriate to additionally display the continuous notice effect image. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the additional data flags are set to off, so at least even if the addition of the continuous advance notice effect is set at this point, the setting can be cleared and the setting is set. It is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being additionally displayed.

In the continuous advance notice command processing, the type of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d is determined, and if it is a display data table for special variation, all the additional data flags are set instead of the processing of S5652. It may be set to off. As a result, even if the continuous notice command processing is executed after setting the display data table for special variation in the display data table buffer 452d, all the additional data flags are set to off, so that the special variation effect can be achieved. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being additionally displayed.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process. As described above in the first embodiment, the normal image transfer setting process is a process executed in the transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35 (b)). While the simple image display flag 452c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. A transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set.

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the address indicated by the pointer 452g updated by the display setting process (S2403, see FIG. 63) executed earlier. Acquire the transfer data information described in (S6201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired transfer data information is Null data (S6202), and if it is not Null data (S6202: No), the character in which the transfer target image data is stored is determined from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of ROM 234, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 452. (S3203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 185 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to the process of S3205.

Further, in the process of S6202, if the acquired transfer data information is Null data (S6202: Yes), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. Then, in the processing of S3205 to S3218, the same processing as the processing of S3205 to S3218 of the normal image transfer setting processing in the first embodiment is performed. Therefore, detailed description of these processes will be omitted.

As described above, in the display control device 114, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the transfer data information described in the address indicated by the pointer 452g of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d is followed. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set to the image controller 237, the image data of the sprite specified by the display data table buffer 452d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. ..

Here, in the display data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the display data table, the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the display data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, only the drawing contents are displayed in the display data table extracted from the data table area 452b in response to a command from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a display variation pattern command). However, since the transfer data information and the transfer timing of the image data to be transferred are defined, the transfer timing can be easily and accurately grasped and controlled. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used for drawing the image performed according to the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the display data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Therefore, in the transfer data table area of the composite data table. Also, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, for each address in the display data table, the drawing content to be displayed at the time indicated by that address is defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred is defined. Before the image data of the sprite is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified from one display data table, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively, as compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information. The processing load required for this can be reduced. Further, since a display data table in which drawing contents and transfer data information are defined is prepared in advance in the data table storage area 452b, a data table that defines drawing contents, a data table that defines additional drawing contents, and transfer Compared with the case where a data table that defines data information is prepared, each data table is synthesized each time, and the drawing content and the transferred data information are specified from the synthesized data table, the processing load is further increased. Can be lightened.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the display data table prepared for each production mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third pattern is displayed with the passage of time. Not only the display content (drawing content) to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, but also the image data used for the display (drawing) that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information to be transferred to and the transfer timing thereof are specified. Further, the display data table defines additional drawing contents corresponding to the effects that can be additionally displayed with respect to the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table.

When the display control device 114 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display data table corresponding to the effect mode is stored in the data table storage area. It is extracted from 452b, stored in the display data table buffer 452d, and the pointer 452g is initialized. Then, after adding 1 to 452 g each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 452d is next drawn based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 452 g. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created by specifying the image content to be transferred and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred at that time. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 gives an image controller 237 a drawing instruction for the image and an image data transfer instruction. If Null data is specified in the transfer data table area of the address indicated by the pointer 452g, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the transfer data information is not included in the drawing list. , The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237.

Further, when the display control device 114 determines the effect to be additionally displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, a plurality of additional displays specified in the display data table can be displayed. An additional drawing content corresponding to the determined effect is specified from among the various effects, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) is created together with the normal drawing content. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image of the effect to be additionally displayed together with the image corresponding to the original effect mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the program to be executed by the MPU 231 is changed in response to a command from the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command or a continuous notice command). The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d.

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the display control device 114 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of the effect images. In addition, since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing the enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable production images will be limited. .. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 452d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the set data table is followed. The reason why the drawing list can be created frame by frame is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. Is. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as the pachinko machine 10, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. Therefore, as described above. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the display data table is set according to the set display data table. The configuration in which the drawing list is created frame by frame is such that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the production mode of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. It can only be realized based on this.

Further, for each address in the display data table, the drawing content to be displayed at the time indicated by that address is defined, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be transferred is defined. Before the image data of the sprite is used, the transfer start timing can be specified and instructed based on the transfer data table area so that the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the drawing content, the transfer data information, and the additional drawing content can be specified from one display data table, the drawing content, the additional drawing content, and the transfer data information can be specified from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table, respectively. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for the specification as compared with the case of specifying the above. Further, since a display data table in which drawing contents, additional drawing contents, and transfer data information are defined is prepared in advance in the data table storage area 452b, a data table that defines drawing contents and data that defines additional drawing contents are prepared. Process by preparing a table and a data table that defines transfer data information, synthesizing each data table each time, and comparing with the case of specifying the drawing content and transfer data information from the combined data table. The load can be further reduced.

The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "variable display" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "variable display" described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information", and the "pseudo-variation" described in the above-described embodiment corresponds to the "special gaming state" described in the claims. Corresponding to the "pseudo dynamic display" described in the claims, the "reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "suggestion display" described in the claims, and is described in the above embodiment. "Special reach" corresponds to the "specific suggestion" described in the claims.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of pseudo-variations when the pseudo-ream is performed, that is, the number of fluctuations with the highest expectation of being the biggest hit when the reach is established, is set to 5, but the number of fluctuations is arbitrary. There may be. For example, it may be 3 times, 4 times, or 6 times or more. However, if the number of pseudo fluctuations is large, the expectation of a big hit gradually increases, so that the interest of the player increases, but if the number of pseudo fluctuations is too large, the player may be bored. Therefore, the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations is preferably 4 to 6 times.

In each of the above embodiments, as the final fluctuation pattern, the number of pseudo fluctuations is 5 times (the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations that gives the highest expectation of a big hit when the reach is established). It did not reach, but once it stopped pseudo-stopping with a design that came off, but after that, it included the role of re-fluctuation and the jackpot being confirmed. However, this role is not always necessary, and there are a role in which the final fluctuation pattern is a special reach and a big hit, and a role in which the final fluctuation pattern is not a reach and a complete deviation is confirmed. Should be included. With these roles, even if the fluctuation display by the pseudo-ream that becomes out of order after 5 pseudo-variations occurs frequently, it is expected that the reach will be established and it will be a big hit by repeating the pseudo-variations in the process leading to the deviation. You can enhance the feeling, and it will not be a pain to approach the disengagement. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect that the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened by frequently causing the pseudo-ream while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a jackpot is always achieved when the reach is reached after 5 pseudo fluctuations (the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations in which the expectation of the jackpot is the highest when the reach is established). It is not necessarily limited to this, and if the number of pseudo-variations included in the pseudo-ream increases, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the reach is established increases, the pseudo-variations of 5 times (maximum number of pseudo-variations) can be obtained. After that, it may become reach and come off. This also has the effect that the pseudo-ream can be frequently generated and the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In addition, when the reach is configured to be out of reach after 5 pseudo fluctuations (maximum number of pseudo fluctuations), the reach is a specific type of reach such as a special reach. Is preferable. As a result, when the fifth pseudo-variation is started, the player plays the game with the expectation that the specific type of reach (special reach) will be established by the fifth pseudo-variation. be able to. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it becomes a specific type of reach (special reach), so even if the result is off, the player feels the joy of becoming a specific type of reach. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game without making the player bored, while further enhancing the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the pseudo-ren is realized by the production by the fighting type fighting game has been described, but if the role as shown in FIG. 8 is given as the role of the pseudo-ren, which mode of the production is It may be something like. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has the motif of a boy who is training as a carpenter, a pseudo-ream may be configured according to the training scene. For example, in each pseudo-variation, a carpentry training effect is displayed in front of the master, and at the time of pseudo stop, a failure is displayed and the master yells at the effect. Then, in the pseudo-variation again, the effect of training again while shedding tears of regret is displayed, and if it finally comes off, the effect of being kicked out by the master is displayed, and if it finally becomes a big hit, Display the production that is praised by the master. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 has a specific singer as a motif, the pseudo-ren will be announced in the order of 5th, 4th, 3rd, etc. in the ranking format for each pseudo fluctuation. It may be configured. In this case, when the song is finally out of service, the effect of announcing the song outside the service area is displayed, and when the song is finally a big hit, the effect of announcing the first-ranked song or the featured song is displayed. In this way, even if the pseudo-ren is configured, if the role shown in FIG. 8 is given in the pseudo-ren, the pseudo-ren can be used without boring the player and while enhancing the interest in the game. It is possible to obtain the effect that the average fluctuation time of one time can be lengthened by making it occur frequently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the image controller 237 is in use by checking only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is set in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When transfer data information other than Null data exists at the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 is started according to the transfer data information. You may do so. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processes in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is common to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is used as an image. It may be provided by directly connecting to the controller 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memo 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memo 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk may be used. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in each of the above embodiments, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. Can be made to.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. A first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 is used in that area after the system reset is released. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

In each of the above embodiments, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the buffer RAM 234c. After setting, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (the internal bus to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected) ( It may be provided by directly connecting to the bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and is larger. Video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi A port type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is used as a resident area and a normal area. The same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may transfer it. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control means 101 or the voice lamp control device is used. Based on the command received from 113, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different. May be good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured as. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memo 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image and the fluctuating image at power-on may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. .. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or frame. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the button operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 200, and may change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the main control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, by turning on the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 41). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 43B) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is mounted on the back surface of the game board 13. It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 425 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

In each of the above embodiments, as an additional data table or a display data table, a case where drawing contents for adding and displaying a continuous advance notice effect which is not normally displayed in the variation effect to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the additional data table or the display data table is added to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 to display the third symbol. Drawing contents for drawing various effects to be displayed on the device 81 may be defined. Further, in the additional data table or the display data table, in order to add and display an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. Instead of defining the required drawing content, or in addition to defining such drawing content, the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in the one production, or one. The drawing contents required to change and display the image displayed in the effect of the above may be defined.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 includes an additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, an additional data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, or a display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. When the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, 452g and the color information that specifies the color tone after the change in the sprite are specified in the additional drawing contents specified in the above, the display data In the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the table buffer 233d, the display data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. The color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g is the color specified by the additional data table, the additional data table area of the composite data table, or the additional drawing content of the display data table. It may be replaced with information to create a drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in one effect is specified by the additional data table or display data table, the additional data table or display data table displays the third symbol. Corresponds to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the device 81 as one unit, and in that time, the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be replaced are newly displayed. It may specify the sprite type to be output and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed. Then, the MPU 231 includes an additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, an additional data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, or a display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. In the additional drawing contents specified in, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the newly displayed sprite are specified at the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g. If so, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table area of the composite data table set in the composite data table buffer 251d, or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d. Among the various sprites specified at the addresses indicated by the pointers 233g, 251g, and 452g in the drawing contents specified in the above, the sprite type to be newly displayed instead of the sprite to be replaced, and the drawing information of the sprite. May be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described, but in addition, the additional transfer which is the transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table has been described. A data table may be prepared. In this additional transfer data table, the sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or display data table) and should start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

In this case, for example, in the first embodiment, when the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 is provided with an additional transfer data table buffer and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table In addition to the transfer data table corresponding to, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer. You may do it. Further, in the second embodiment, when the composite data table is provided with the additional transfer data table area and the composite data table is generated from the display data table and the transfer data table, the Null data is stored in the additional transfer data table area. If the contents of the additional data table are added to the additional data table area of the composite data table after writing, the contents of the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table are added to the composite data table together with the addition. It may be added to the transfer data table area. Then, if the transfer data information is described in the additional transfer data table area provided at the address indicated by the pointer 251g in the composite data table buffer set in the composite data table buffer 251d, the MPU 231 will transfer data. Information may be added to the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. Additional data tables allow you to specify the drawing of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the second embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. Therefore, the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first and second embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern in which the player selects the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. In addition, the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the player has been explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and it is regarded as an effect of adding and displaying each super reach, and each of them. An additional data table corresponding to the super reach is prepared, and an additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, or the contents of the additional data table are combined data. It may be added to the composite data table set in the table buffer 251d. Further, the drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data third of the display data table.

In the third embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content, the transfer data information, and the additional drawing content has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table includes the drawing content. And the transfer data information are specified, and the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table as in the first embodiment. In this case, the work RAM 452 is provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined as in the first embodiment, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is added to the additional data table buffer. You may set it. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is described, for example. , "Fluctuation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach fluctuation", "Super reach fluctuation" Prepare a display data table for each element, and respond to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is created. It may be generated. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided. In particular, in the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", "super reach fluctuation", "special reach fluctuation", etc. due to the pseudo-variation are commonly used in each pseudo-ream. Since there are many elements that can be used, in a game machine in which a variation effect is performed by a pseudo-ream, the effect of improving the efficiency of the data table by elementizing the variation effect and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element can be achieved. Get bigger.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use a common pointer 233 g and specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233 g has been described. However, pointers may be prepared for each data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each image display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) for one frame at which the drawing process is completed. As described above, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the composite data table generated after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffers 233d and 452d or based on the confirmed display data table is the composite data table. After being set in the buffer 251d, a variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and a demo command (display demo command) are sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. If none of the above is received, the case where the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d has been described, but this is again changed to the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. The display data table buffers 233d and 452d may be set, or the composite data table generated based on the confirmed display data table may be set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is reset to the display data table buffer 233d, or the synthetic data table generated based on the finalized display data table is set to the synthetic data table buffer 251d. You may do so. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. Transferred to the variable image area 235b at the time of turning on, and after the transfer is completed, the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 314, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, the transfer data table, and the composite data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) ) And the case where the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) is specified, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. Just do it. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at a predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may specify the address of the character ROM 234. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the stored image discrimination flags 233j, 251j, and 452j are provided in the work RAM 233, 251 and 452 of the display control device 114, and the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. Although the case of storing whether or not the image is stored has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233, 251 and 452 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing the transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, 251 and 452, and uses the information indicating the sprite type. It is determined whether or not the predetermined image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, 251 and 452, and the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a in which the image is stored may be deleted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is the normal video based on the stored image discrimination flags 233j, 251j, 452j. A case where it is determined whether or not the data is stored in the RAM 437, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process will be described. However, this process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, flags equivalent to the stored image discrimination flags 233j, 251j, and 452j are prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. You may remember whether or not you are there. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the addresses indicated by the pointers 233 g, 251 g, and 452 g, and the MPU 231 has a predetermined value defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the transfer command in time from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the head of the display data table is described. In, the information regarding the sprite type required in the display data table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to do so. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp controller 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 has the third symbol display device 81. A fourth symbol display device different from the above is provided, and a continuous advance notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. May be good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. However, the sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an effect different from the usual one. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice production can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous advance notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). Or, by changing the combination of them), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, loss) after the end of the continuous advance notice production are prepared. Good.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol to be displayed when the variable effect is completed. In this case, in the continuous advance notice command processing (see FIG. 39 (a)) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other The stop symbol determination flag may be set to off. In the command judgment processing, since the continuous advance notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. Sometimes the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device of various counters (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning. The case where the information is included in the reserved ball count command has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various counters (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command are described. The information of the stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 includes information on various counters (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of starting winning in the hold ball number command. After that, the hold ball number command was transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 transmitted the hold ball number command according to the values of various counters included in the hold ball number command. Estimate the result of the lottery performed corresponding to the reserved balls held at the time and the stop type after the fluctuation effect, and based on the estimated result and the number of reserved balls held at that time, the continuous notice effect is performed. The case of deciding whether or not to do it has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 estimates the result of the lottery corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the fluctuation effect from the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start prize, and at least a part of the estimated result is the number of reserved balls. The voice lamp control device 113 may be notified by including it in the command, and the voice lamp control device 113 may decide whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect based on the notified estimation result. Further, whether or not the main control device 110 may perform the continuous advance notice effect based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the variation effect, which is estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start prize. Whether or not to determine at least the determination result in the hold ball number command and notify the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 finally performs a continuous advance notice effect based on the judgment result. May be determined. Further, the main control device 110 determines whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, includes the determination result in the hold ball number command and notifies the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs the continuous notice effect. Only the production mode may be determined. As information to be included in the hold ball number command, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning prize, information on the stop type after the fluctuation effect, information on whether or not continuous advance notice effect can be performed, or continuous advance notice effect is performed. By using the information as to whether or not, the command size of the hold ball number command can be reduced as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, the information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning prize, the information on the stop type after the variable effect, the information on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect may be performed, or the information on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is performed is available. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command different from the hold ball number command.

In each of the above embodiments, when a continuous notice command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 corresponds to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command. The case where the transfer instruction is given to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command constitutes the same effect type continuous advance notice effect. In this case, after the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is completed. It may be controlled as follows. As a result, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

Further, when the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous advance notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type indicated by the continuous advance notice command but also the step. The transfer instruction may be given to transfer the image data corresponding to all the continuous advance notice image types used in the up-type continuous advance notice effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Further, also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous advance notice image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous advance notice effect is completed. May be good. As a result, the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used by the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the same image data.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the continuous advance notice determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 32), and the continuous advance notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous advance notice image type used in the continuous advance notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. May be good. As a result, it is possible to start the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 even before the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used by the continuous advance notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

Further, the continuous advance notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous advance notice effect for which the variation effect is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, and therefore, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous advance notice effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the execution of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type by the continuous notice command has been described, but this notification is varied for display. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variation display process (see FIG. 33) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, when the display variation pattern command is generated (S2105), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the sequence is continuous. When the advance notice effect is performed, the information regarding the execution and the continuous advance notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received display variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is used. In addition to instructing transfer to the normal video RAM 236, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous preview image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the additional data table and the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command are used. A composite data table may be generated from the fluctuation data table corresponding to the above and the transfer data table corresponding to the fluctuation data table, and set in the composite data table buffer 251d. Further, in the third embodiment, when the received display variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type is turned on. By setting to, the additional drawing content of the effect corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type may be specified from the display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

Further, in the first and second embodiments, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type, the display data table that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice image for each variation pattern. And a display data table corresponding to each continuous notice image type are prepared, and the display control device 114 prepares a corresponding display data table according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set in the display data table buffer 233d. That is, the display data table may include both the drawing contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing contents of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, since the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice image type may be given in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is voice lamp control based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out of reach) determined by the main control device 110. The case where the setting is made by the device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 113 determines the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the last suspended symbol for stopping the variable effect is stopped. If is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing it with a stop symbol in a front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110, but always has a front-rear out-of-front reach, which gives the player a high expectation. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the pending variation effects, each variation effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each variation. In this case, the effect mode of the variation effect other than the last reserved variation effect may be changed to the out-of-order variation effect. Then, by the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2105 in FIG. 33), the variation pattern is changed according to the setting status of the continuous advance notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect. You may. If the stop symbol after the variation effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the variation effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the variation effect is displayed as it is based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 110. You may. Here, even if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation in which the jackpot does not appear as a result even though the corresponding variation effect mode is, for example, the super reach variation effect, the player's expectation However, it is executed last because the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed and the variable effect other than the last executed variable effect is continuously performed in the off-variable effect. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the variable production.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in the situation where the execution of the advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed at high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them has been described, but instead of displaying the high speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one first entry slot 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Rather, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entry ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when receiving the hold ball number command, all the first ball entry ports are at that time. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the variable effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of first entrances are provided and the variation effect held in one first entry port is preferentially executed, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be decided only when the ball is entered into the first entrance. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the low priority first entrance, so that the continuous advance notice effect is given to the variable effect held at the low priority first entrance. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with high priority, it is possible to prevent the situation where the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is reduced by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted according to the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S1207). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1205 in FIG. 23), and the hold ball number command has a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2107 in FIG. 33 is omitted. When the value (N) of the subtracted number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 is transmitted, the information indicating that the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls after the subtraction (that is, the start winning prize) is sent to the reserved ball number command. The hold ball number command may be generated without including the values of various counters acquired with the start winning, including information indicating that the number of reserved balls is not added in accordance with the above. Then, since the determination as to whether or not to allow the continuous advance notice effect is performed when there is a start winning prize, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command in the command determination process (see FIG. 32). When reception is detected, if the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number command is the number of reserved balls after subtraction, that is, if it is not the number of reserved balls added with the start winning, the continuous notice determination process You may want to skip the execution of.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous notice effect when the hold ball number command is received, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, it may be further decided whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. .. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have an expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance notice effect, and the effect that does not make the player bored is performed. Can be done. In this case, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 updates each time the variation display process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and provides a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect. You may. Then, in the variation display processing, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed (S2109: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice command may be set (S2110). Further, in this case, the number (range) of a predetermined value of the counter that sets the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a when determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, the variation pattern of the variable effect for which the determination is made, and the series. The game state after the end of the continuous advance notice production (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, miss), or a combination of two or more of these can be mentioned. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. ..

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, continuous notice is replaced with commands generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, such as a continuous notice command and an error occurrence command. Generates various flags such as flags and error occurrence flags, and displays the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, and composite data table based on the flags. Data table buffers 233d, 452d, transfer data table buffer 233f, additional data. It may be set in the table buffer 233e or the composite data table buffer 251d, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or a necessary image data transfer instruction may be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

A display means for displaying identification information such as a symbol, a main control means for controlling a game, and a slave for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on a control command transmitted from the main control means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means and imparting a special gaming state which is a predetermined game value when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information, the slave control means is the said. A selection means for selecting a display mode for dynamic display of the identification information to be performed by the display means from a plurality of types of display modes to be executed in the dynamic display of the identification information when a control command is received is provided. The display mode includes a plurality of display modes in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and the predetermined number of times is different. , Suggestion that the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed may cause the predetermined display result to appear. The display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected so that the expectation that the predetermined display result appears when the display is performed is the highest, and the suggestion display is performed. When selecting a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the specified number of times. A game machine A1 characterized by selecting.

According to the game machine A1, the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and the predetermined number of times is the display mode. A plurality of different display modes are included. Then, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. Is the highest expectation that the predetermined display result will appear when the suggestion display suggesting that the predetermined display result may appear in the dynamic display is performed. In addition, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display. When the display is performed, the pseudo dynamic display is always performed a specific number of times. As a result, even if the suggestion display is not performed after a specific number of pseudo dynamic displays and a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times. As a result, the suggestion display is performed, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation that a predetermined display result will appear. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display the identification information of the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display that can lengthen the time related to the dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, so that the player can go to the game without getting bored. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be lengthened while enhancing the interest of the user.

In the game machine A1, the specific number of times is the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed most among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. A game machine A2 characterized by being.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, since the specific number of times is the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed most among the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. When the identification information is dynamically displayed in the most pseudo-dynamic display mode among the display modes in which the pseudo-dynamic display is performed, a predetermined display is performed in the dynamic display. When a suggestion display suggesting that the result may appear is performed, the expectation that the predetermined display result will appear is the highest. In addition, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in a display mode in which a pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display, the pseudo dynamic display is always performed. Among the display modes in which the dynamic display is performed, the display mode in which the most pseudo dynamic display is performed is selected. As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times is frequently performed, so that the dynamic display time of the identification information at one time can be lengthened. is there.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the selection means is predetermined when the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times is selected from the display modes in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. When a suggestion display suggesting that the display result may appear, the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is determined so that the appearance of the predetermined display result is confirmed. A game machine A3 characterized in that the player selects.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means. When a suggestion display suggesting that a predetermined display result may appear in the dynamic display of the identification information is performed, the appearance of the predetermined display result is confirmed. As a result, even if the suggestion display is not performed after a specific number of pseudo dynamic displays and a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times. Therefore, the suggestion display is performed, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation that the appearance of the predetermined display result is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to frequently display the identification information of the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display that can lengthen the time related to the dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, so that the player can play the game without getting bored. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be lengthened while further enhancing the interest in the information.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed is a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed at least three times.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines A1 to A3, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed is a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed at least three times. Therefore, by frequently using the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed as the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display time of one identification information can be further extended. There is an effect. In addition, in the pseudo dynamic display, when an effect having some kind of story is performed, the pseudo dynamic display is performed at least three times, so that the story can be sufficiently conveyed to the player. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further enhanced.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed includes information that changes each time the pseudo dynamic display is performed in addition to the pseudo dynamic display. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is to be displayed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines A1 to A4, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed, the pseudo dynamic display is performed. At the same time, information that changes each time the pseudo dynamic display is performed is also displayed, so that the player can easily know the number of times the pseudo dynamic display is executed by looking at the display. At the same time, as the information changes, the expectation that a predetermined display result will appear can be gradually increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more easily absorbed when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, when the selection means performs the suggestion display as the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display increases in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected so that the predetermined display result is more likely to appear.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed as a result of the selection of the display mode by the selection means, the greater the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display, the more suggestive. When the display is performed, there is a high possibility that a predetermined display result will appear. As a result, even if the suggestion display is not performed after a specific number of pseudo dynamic displays and a display result different from the predetermined display result appears, the pseudo dynamic display is performed in the process up to that point. It is possible to gradually increase the expectation that a predetermined display result will appear until the display is performed a specific number of times. There is an effect that the dynamic display time of one identification information can be lengthened while enhancing the interest in the game without making the player bored.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5 and B1, the suggestion display is performed when the selection means selects a display mode in which the number of times the pseudo dynamic display is performed is less than the specific number of times. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are played. That is, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, when the identification information of the dynamic display is performed in the display mode in which the number of times of pseudo dynamic display is less than the specific number of times, the predetermined display result appears. Suggestions are displayed regardless of whether or not they are used. As a result, when the identification information of the dynamic display is performed in the display mode in which the number of times of the pseudo dynamic display is less than the specific number of times, the display result different from the predetermined display result may appear. However, since the suggestion display is always performed, the player continues to have the expectation that the predetermined display result will appear until some display result appears in the dynamic display of the identification information. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest can be kept to the end.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, and C1, when the selection means selects a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed the specified number of times as the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information. In addition, when the suggestion display is performed by the dynamic display of the identification information, the game is characterized in that the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected so that the specific suggestion display is performed. Machine D1.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, and C1, the following effects are played. That is, as a result of selecting the display mode by the selection means, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times, the suggestion display is performed by the dynamic display of the identification information. If so, a specific suggestion is made. As a result, when the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number of times is started, the player also has a feeling of expectation that the specific suggestion display will be performed by the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number of times. You can play games while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

In the game machine D1, the specific suggestion display is the suggestion display having the highest expectation that a predetermined display result appears among the suggestion displays.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the specific suggestion display is the suggestion display with the highest expectation that a predetermined display result appears among the suggestion displays, so that the specific number of times is specified. When the pseudo dynamic display of the above is started, the player can further increase the expectation that the specific suggestion display will be performed by the pseudo dynamic display of the specific number of times. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, and D2, the selection means dynamically displays the identification information when the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information. As one of the display modes for displaying, after performing the pseudo dynamic display a specific number of times, a display result different from the predetermined display result is once pseudo-appeared, and then the identification information is displayed again. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a display mode in which the above-mentioned predetermined display result is displayed is selected by dynamically displaying the above.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect played by any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1 and D2, the following effects are played. That is, when displaying a predetermined display result in the dynamic display of the identification information, after performing the pseudo dynamic display a specific number of times, a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed in a pseudo manner. A display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then a predetermined display result is displayed is selected by the selection means as one of the display modes in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. As a result, even if a display result different from the predetermined display result appears after the pseudo dynamic display of a specific number of times is performed, the identification information is dynamically displayed again and determined in advance. The player can continue to have the expectation that the displayed result may appear until the displayed result is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end with the dynamic display of the identification information by the pseudo dynamic display.

A game machine F1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2, and E1, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2, and E1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, C1, D1, D2, and E1, the game machine F3 is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of slave control means)
114 Display control device (part of slave control means)
222a Detailed variation pattern determination table (part of selection means)
223b Detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter (part of selection means)
S2104 (part of selection means)

Claims (1)

A display means for displaying identification information such as a symbol, a main control means for controlling a game, and a slave for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on a control command transmitted from the main control means. With control means,
In a gaming machine that imparts a special gaming state, which is a predetermined gaming value, when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information.
The slave control means
When the control command is received, a selection means for selecting the display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed by the display means from a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. Prepare,
The display mode includes a plurality of display modes in which pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information, and the predetermined number of times is different.
In the selection means, there is a possibility that the predetermined display result may appear in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed a specific number of times in the display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed. The display mode of the dynamic display of the identification information is selected so that the expectation that the predetermined display result will appear is the highest when the suggestion display suggesting the above is performed. When selecting a display mode in which the pseudo dynamic display is performed when a display result different from the predetermined display result is displayed without performing the suggestion display, the pseudo dynamic display is specified. A gaming machine characterized in that a display mode to be performed a number of times is selected.